Home

GLOFA-GM

1. 2 Received frame setting RECEIVE It describes how to register RECEIVE frame as of No 2 received frame in frame list in Figure5 2 No 2 frame is Supposed to be received frame in the structure as below Received data of 6 byte means variable data of 6 byte Trans Sequence Header lt Frame body Frame type Header Command CONST Data ARRAY Trans frame ASCII code maf User can define the frame in the sequence below in the Figure 5 2 if communication frame Cnet I F module is to receive is as above and if the figure of 6 byte behind OORB is the contact data variable area which is transmitted from the other station A Double click on frame No 2 to edit in Figure 5 2 with mouse B If frame setting screen as in Figure 5 7 is displayed input frame name to be received and TX RX along with ACK in header while the name and header setting are same as in transmission In this case input frame name as of RECEIVE Note1 When inputting name do notuse UDATA SEND or UDATA_ RCV which performs special function Refer to 7 1 User defined communication for more information Figure5 7 Setting of received frame type The 2th Main Frame x Frame Name RECEIVE TaB Receive Header Ack Immediate Response REPLY C If set to Receive frame name of immediate response can be set by REPLY input Immediate response function Is used in protocol which informs the other station
2. 5 become On in sequence RS 232C channel LED and RS 422 channel LED become On and RUN LED becomes On then normal operation starts If after power on error occurs during the self diagnosis SYS ERROR LED blinks and LED of error occurrence item lights according to error code For the details see 9 2 Diagnosis during power on A 6 Appendix A 2 Error code table A 2 1 Error code for user defined communication If error occurs in execution of function block with SND MSG amp RCV_MSG function block for user defined communication the error code Is indicated on status output of function block The following table is for error codes occurred in execution of function Meaning Input to FNAM isn t present or more than 16 figures Position of Cnet I F module is incorrectly specified Cnet I F module isnt applied to the slot assigned to SLOT NO or is out of order Input parameter of function block is incorrect EXCH LEND a Response frame not requested has been received Response frame from Cnet I F module has not been received waiting time excceded Operation of RS 232C 422 channel is not RUN Frame names used in frame editor and in communication command do not fit each other Frame name can not be found due to abnormal CPU during operation during transmission Frame specified in FNAM has not been received from other station Frame has not been downloaded from frame editor A 7 Action to
3. 7 If the message below is shown version of Cnet I F module is below Ver 2 0 and online mode change is unavailable 8 The changed mode is saved in flash memory of Cnet I F module as kept even if powered off 9 Operation mode in online mode set is valid only in online mode If mode switch is selected in off line mode from 0 to 7 the operation mode is decided according to each mode switch 10 Operation mode of Cnet module can be also read via Frame Editor even though Cnet module is not in online mode Select Read button with slot number and connection stage set to local in online mode change menu as below Notet 5 37 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Online Change Mode Remark Note1 Operation mode can be read in the other modes than LOOP BACK mode and flash writing mode 11 The figure above shows the screen for operation mode which has been read with online off line information and operation mode displayed Online Change Mode x Read screen of operation mode in online mode 5 38 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Read screen of operation mode in off line mode 12 The figure above shows the screen for operation mode which has been read with online off line information and operation mode displayed 13 14 Changing and reading the operation mode are unavailable for below Cnet Ver 2 0 If operation mode is changed during normal operation RS 232C RS 422 channel stops operation for approx 1 seco
4. 2 Sequence of command frame A Sequence of command request frame Station Comman Formatted ENQ EOT BCC No d data PLC ACK response Station Data Command EX I BGG or null PLC NAK response Station Error Command code B Sequence of download upload frame Station Start ENQ data EOT BCC command Down upload start command Station Command or null Down upload command frame number H0001 Station Command or null Station Comman Formatted ENQ EOT BCC No d data Station Comman Formatted Down upload end command EOT BCC Frame number HFFFF Station Data ACK Command ETX BCC No or null No d data 7 38 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 2 3 List of commands Table 7 11 describes commands used in dedicated communication service Table 7 11 List of commands Command Main Command ASCII Command type ASCII Contents Classification WN aQ code code Individual H72 Reads direct variables of Bit Byte Word Dword AR iso os 15353 J d Dieci reading and Lword types mae PEN Pe Reads directvariables of Byte Word Dword and eIeaging r R SB H5342 Lword types in block unit Continuous reading of reading H52 M Bitis unavailable 400 Reads data according to data type of named Continuous AR H72 H3030 variable amed reading H52 414 H3134 Variable to be read must be registered in
5. Cnet 1 Mobile body up and down RS 232C Optical modem Cnet 4 STATION Optical modem RS 422 Interface RS 422 Interface Cnet 3 RS 232C Optical modem Chapter 6 System configuration 6 1 8 Wireless modem communication between revolution bodies Q Wireless modem communication system for Cnet communication on body in revolution motion Q RS 232C communication with wireless modem Q Dedicated master slave communication between Cnet I F modules Q User defined communication between Cnets in former version than Cnet Ver 2 0 LY RS 232C channel of Cnet I F module is dedicated modem mode Figure 6 8 Wireless modem communication system Wireless modem Wireless modem Cnet 2 Cnet 1 RS 232C Interface RS 232C Interface Module setting Type RS 232C RS 422 Channel mode Station No Dedicated mode Cnet 1 2 Not used Stand alone channel Chapter 6 System configuration 6 1 9 TM TC communication system Q Long distance communication with remote slave PLC via dedicated modem Q Dedicated modem communication via RS 232C channel set to dedicated modem mode Q Dedicated master slave communication between Cnet I F modules Q User defined communication between Cnets in former version than Cnet Ver 2 0 Q Max 8 Cnet I F modules can be mounted on TM master PLC using GM1 2 3 Figure 6 9 TM TC dedicated modem system Dedicated modem LLLLI LELLI PEL ETITI TILTI Chapte
6. RX data area RD1 defines memory area to save data received to RD1 area registered to ARRAY in Frame Editor ARRAY number shall be set at least the Same as the number to transmit which is registered in frame with data type set to USINT ARRAY RDI ROI DUMMY RD LENS DUMMY As ARRAY area of receiving frame is just one set unused receiving area as of DUMMY variable to Auto memory area OUMMY ROA Remark Note 1 Receiving flag is available only in Cnet Ver 1 1 or later If Cnet version is below Ver 1 1 use a faster timer than transmission cycle in transmission station instead of the receiving flag If RD_ DATA frame is received via RS 422 channel in the program of F igure7 12 24 byte data same as the number of received data set in receiving Frame Editor is saved to MB100 area setto RD1 and 24 is output to LEN1 among LEN1 LEN4 indicating receiving data length Figure7 13 shows variable setting screen of saving area RD1 of receiving data 24 ARRAY variables are allocated to MB100 area with USINT ARRAY type If ARRAY number is lower than RD1 number of receiving frame registered transmission is not available thus it shall be at least the same 7 23 Chapter 7 Communication function Figure below shows an example of setting as same as the number of receiving data Figure7 13 Setting of receiving variable Add Edit Variables f i Ad Hirik x i 2 7 5 5 E f
7. cm s SSC S 0417 550 8379 C Select Remote 1 of depth of connection stages and set station No as specified in Cnet I F module The station No shall be surely input if the module is of Ver 2 0 or later For the former versions no need to set station No because basic values are good enough for connection Station numbers are not compared for GMWIN connection in the former versions D Select Connect in On line after connection option setting to display dialog box for modem initializing Modem Status Chapter 8 Exercising program E If COM port of modem is incorrectly set or connection with modem is abnormal the following error message is displayed In this case inspect COM port or modem connection F If telephoning is completed GMWIN tries remote connection automatically and if remote connection is completed program write and run stop icon menus are activated as below G This means that remote 1 stage connection is completed just like the connection status that RS 232C cable is connected as moved where all functions in On line menu are available H To release connection in remote connection status select Disconnect in On line menu to display Disconnect menu box as in the figure below indicating Disconnected I If connection is released GMWIN hangs up the phone automatically to disconnect it If the phone is hung up normally local and remote modem is restored to initial status to allow remot
8. communication command CPU internal error occurred Contact Service Station lt 11 5 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Frame name used in communication Is STATUS value in operation 66 command is not in existence Define frame correctly to register Array HEX value is not defined correctly Correct array type N Frame definition and commu Check communication command and frame nication command correct editor Y N Are basic parameters agre l PAE T Let basic parameters agreed between communication stations Y N Is cable connection correct Connect cable correctly Y Contact Service station 11 6 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 11 2 3 Error code ERR 4 ERR 5 Receive monitor data error RX monitor data error Isn t the received data monitorec from the beginning Let communication command amp frame definition set correct Are communication command amp frame definition set correct Check cable if connected securely or not No error in cable connection See user s manual of CPU to remove CPU error Any serious error in CPU Check error code and perform trouble shooting Any error in communication module Close monitor screen amp frame editor screen and then execute RX monitor screen again 11 7 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 11 2 4 Error code ERR 6 ERR 7 Transmission monitor data error TX monitor data error Isn tt
9. y uo 1323S LD wD G Q i j OAC S WWUOD p Ipaq Read rsponse GM_RD_ ACK Chapter 8 Exercising program C GMWIN programming After frame edit is completed prepare program via GMWIN to allow TX RX in sequence as In Figure 8 6 Use SND _MSG RCV_MSG Function Blocks to allow Cnet 1 2 3 stations in user defined mode to communicate with Cnet station 4 which is dedicated communication slave station with library insertion selected from project menu prior to programming to insert COMMUNI 4FB User defined TX RX programs shall be set respectively for 1 2 3 stations Data mapping Is all identical for 3 stations thus the same program may be used Figure 8 7 shows program for data writing and its response frame receiving Figure 8 7 Function Block program for data writing Controlling flag of TX point of Write request frame initial value 1 wm st sat _RCVO_232 WRACK 1 WRACK NOR WRACE ERR REY MSG 5 eet RE n 0 SLOT ERR a wo T U CH Te RX flag monitoring the CH STAT GM_WR receiving of Write aM Ip ac T response frame FNAM n SU_SAVE RU n 40 PO A a sll RO ROS LENA U Function Block for receiving of response frame to Write request Function Block for Write request TX Use SND _MSG Function Block in the figure to send 40 bytes of TX data to GM WR frame via RS 232C channel TX point of time is controlled through WR_START In case of normal respon
10. Frame Informations Header ENQ 65 null G null SG null G8 null BCC Default Chapter 5 Frame Editor 5 2 3 Frame writing reading Basic parameters and frame set by using Frame Editor can be written downloaded to Cnet I F module or read uploaded from Cnet I F module 1 Writing download A First connect GMWIN cable to COM terminal of PLC CPU module equipped on Cnet I F module PC and COM terminal of PLC shall be connected Figure 5 11 Connection diagram of GMWIN cable fe Cable connection of RS 232C B Select Online Connect in Frame Editor and connect to CPU to display connection completed message Note1 Remark Note1 Online connection via Frame Editor is unavailable if GMWIN program is connected If GMWIN program IS in service try the connection after GMWIN is disconnected surely switch PLC CPU over to STOP before basic parameters or frame is downloaded If downloaded in PLC run mode writing error may occur C Select Online Wnte in Frame Editor to display the dialog box as below 5 23 Chapter 5 Frame Editor D Select communication channel to use among RS 232C RS 422 in basic screen of Frame Editor E Select menu Online Write to display the Write dialog box as below and set slot number where Cnet is equipped Communication option to download is for selecting option among basic parameters and frame Select All to download basic parameters and frame
11. If error occurs 1 is output as kept until next Function Block is called STATUS If error occurs error code is output Function Function Block to transmit the frame registered in frame list Error Error code is output to output STATUS Refer to Error codes for details 7 33 Chapter 7 Communication function B Error codes status of Function Block gg Slave Device Busy During TX RX or Waiting for receiving Setting error of communication parameters or Setting error of link Parameter Error _ permission Frame Type Error Frame is not in transmission or not set C Error flag Errors related with frame list v Savedto UD_ERR n Enor fag on transmission side BCC Check Error If received BCC value is incorrect Mismatch Error If received frame isn t agreed with registered frame Error flag on Bit 10 HEX Change Error Error occurs on HEX converting receiving side Bit 11 Frame List Error Frame setting error or link permission setting error 7 34 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 2 Dedicated communication slave 7 2 1 Introduction Dedicated communication function as of a protocol built in computer communication module is used to read or write information and data inside PLC of PC and supplementary devices without additional programming in GLOFA PLC and also used to download upload PLC program and control PLC Run Stop Pause Dedicated communication service can be available independently both
12. LG Programmable Logic Controller Cnet I F Module G3L CUEA G4L CUEA G6L CUEB G6L CUEC G7L CUEB G7L CUEC GLOFA GM C LG INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS This user s manual describes functions of Cnet I F module Please read this manual carefully to understand the functions thoroughly prior to system design lt Revision record Date of issue revised Contents revised redin SS ie hee GM7CnetI F module added revision ee Functions of frame editor Version 2 0 added Chapter 1 Introduction eecesococooooooocooooocooocoooooooooooooooooooooocosoooooooooooocooooocosoooooooooooooo 1 1 1 7 1 1 Module selection per CPU type ceseeesoooesooooosoooooesooooesoooosooooocooooooesooooosooooseooooeoooooooo 1 2 1 2 FUNCTIONS of Version 2 0 ccrrrcrrcrrc ccc cece rssceecesececes secs eneeseecseneessesccssseesssseessseeeeesens 1 3 iD el Version check Coc errr e cence cee r recess cee r ese ers seers seers sees s sees sees s sees sseessseeesseeessseens 1 3 1 2 2 Added functions Introduction of Version 2 Drcccrrccccsccccscc esse cceseecesecccsccccseccsscccseecccens 1 6 1 2 3 Established functions soccer cee t ttt t ttt e et eee teen eee een cesses eee esens essen eeessesessssesessseees tey 1 2 4 Frame editor Version D O eeeeeeesooeeeeeesoooceeeoooooeeeeoooooceceooooceecoooooccecoooooceeeoooooee l 7 1 2 5 Added function of Version 2 0 eeeeeeeeseeeseeeesssesssesesoseooooooosoooseeoooooooosoosssssesoeeeooos 1 7 Chapter 2 Definition OF TArMS ccrrrcrcrcr rec
13. Note1 Mode change during operation is unavailable The mode switch value of the front shall be set to required position surely after power off Note2 Each operation per channel shall be started surely after setting transmission spec of channels RS 232C and RS 422 and writing for each channel of RS 232C and RS 422 in Frame Editor Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 1 3 Channel operation in self diagnosis mode Loop Back Loop Back diagnosis is a function to check if communication channel is normally operated by itself without connection with external devices and is operated only if the mode switch is in Loop Back mode For the details of operation method see Chapter 9 Diagnosis function 4 5 Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 2 Method of serial interface 4 2 1 RS 232C interface Channel RS 232C uses 9 pin connector Female for communication with external devices The names and functions of pins and data directions are as shown in the figure below Figure 4 3 Pin specifications of 9 pin connector for RS 232C Signal direction PinNo Name Contents Cnet lt gt external Description devices Carrier Detect Reports carrier detection of DCE to DTE Received Data lt ____ Received data signal Transmitted Data Transmitted data signal Data Terminal DT gt Reports communication ready of DTE to DCE Ready D R Data Set Ready Reports communication ready of DCE to DTE RTS Request To Sen
14. v Ifframe No is not HFFFF within 1 second after receiving this frame the upload command must be sent with the current frame No increased by 1 7 93 Chapter 7 Communication function For PLC NAK response after execution of command tion Command ASCII value ane ras o ae sot m 1303 wssse H30304646 7 94 Chapter 7 Communication function C1 Domain Program Delete PEN PED This command deletes Domain Program in PLC This service is not to delete program contents simply but to set up a State where no program Is in existence To perform this service PI shall be surely deleted first via MDN command in Stopping state of PLC mode 1 Request format PC gt PLC tati ASCII value E oe a PU Pew H3130 H50 70 H454E 4 H3035 H4C47504C43 v fD Default has been used instead of N in command type DM_LEN and DM_NAME are unnecessary v DM_LEN displays the number of Domain name s characters in the range of H01 H10 v DM_NAME shall specify Domain Program name up to HEX 8 Bytes which is currently saved in PLC If the name is unknown use P_ DOMAIN BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 2 Response format for PLC of ACK response ranewave eno nm em en o m w woo wen s ASCII value v Station number commands and type
15. 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 or 57600 bps can be set Data bit 7 or 8 Bits are available Parity bit None Even or Odd can be set e RS232C null modem or RS 422 485 Channel to select for communication via built in function of GM7 basic unit and Cnet I F module G7L CUEC e RS232C dedicated modem Selected for dedicated modem communication via Cnet I F module G 7L CUEB e RS232C dial up modem Selected for normal modem communication by telephoning to the other station via Cnet I F module G 7L CUEB Note RS232C dedicated modem and RS232C dial up modem communication is available only in Cnet I F module G 7L CUEB supporting RS232C not in Cnet I F module G7L CUEC Supporting RS 422 485 Communication channel e Waiting time for response frame after request frame is transmitted from GM7 basic unit set to master Time out for l e Default value is 500ms master setting a a e Setting shall be applied in consideration of the max TX RX period of master PLC e f lower value than the max TX RX period is set communication error may occur Dedicated master B l Sas l ia If setto master writing reading of data to GM7 basic unit setto slave are available slave l In case GM7 basic unit status specified to slave is read Reading of slave status If not for monitoring of slave status specially do not select it It may cause communication speed to be decreased 7 107 Chapter 7 Communication function B Setting of entry
16. ASCII value APIF H3031 H4458 H30304646 H3137 H31303535 34304641 w Remark Note 1 Frame No and the number of data are indicated in HEX value For PLC ACK response after execution of command Frame Header ie Command ommani Frame No Number of data Tail type check Talatel we wor m fen ecc Frame E ASCII value T H3031 H50 70 H4458 H30304646 H3137 hae 7 86 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 87 Chapter 7 Communication function For PLC NAK response after execution of command io Main Command Number Header Frame No Error code command type of data amet sf ae me sot ree woos Hoo 430304646 H3137 N ASCII value 7 88 Chapter 7 Communication function C1 program upload start command PUN PUD GLOFA GM series have user program of compile type so they can not partly perform upload by specifying step address Therefore the upload must be entirely peformed from start command in sequence GLOFA GM series call user program with PI command the Domain This domain has similar characteristics to the existing PLC program But it is different that the domain may be deleted and has several domains are available Program upload start command is an initialization service when it performs domain program upload service If this service Is successful upload the program by using program upload command Remark Note 1 The delay time between this command and program upload command m
17. F Header Si atta OE koe a llamar Hanes gen el type check rae E m cen mo pican nos pom cor ace ASCII value H3031 H4D 6D H434E H3037 H504C435F52554E H3033 H50474D a For PLC ACK response after execution of command ee Station No Command type Frame check frame tex ac m mm w f ascivaue Hoe Hor Hoen 434 on E For PLC NAK response after execution of command frome tex me m T a eee e ASCII value H3031 H4D 6D H434E Error code 4 en 7 79 Chapter 7 Communication function C PI DELETE cancel command MDN MDD For updating P the existing PI shall be surely deleted first with the service of PI Delete This command is executed only when PI has been created by PI_ Create service 1 Request format PC gt PLC Header el Command comand PIN LEN PIN NAME Tai HIM ETE FJ Frame Ex PI e ASCII value mam H3130 H4D 6D H444E 44 H3034 H4C474953 Hose P N_LEN is where the number of PI name s characters is displayed PI N NAME is where PI name is located When PI name is executed as specified the max number of characters is 16 Ny w S If no name is required use D instead of N in command type If D has been used PI N_LEN and PI N_NAME are unnecessary S PI N_NAME shall be the name to specify or defaultname of P_ Program BCC When command is one of lower case m only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to
18. QL IL ML QL IL Refer to technical spec of GLOFA PLC for details to specify the area of each device in GLOFA GM Remark Note 1 Device data type of each block shall be surely identical If the 1st block is WORD and the 2 74 block is DOUBLE WORD in data type error occurs 2 Response format for PLC of ACK response Command Header Station No Command type CK ASCII H06 H3230 H52 72 value Number of Number of Data blocks Data Frame E x block A H20 R r SS H01 H02 HA9F3 H4139463 H5353 H3031 H3032 3 bo 1 block M ax 4 blocks Repeated v Station number commands type of command and number of blocks are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Number of data means Byte number of HEX type and is converted into ASCII This number is determined according to memory type X B W D L included in direct variable name of computer request format 1 44 Chapter 7 Communication function Table 7 16 Number of data according to variables Classification Direct variable available Number of data Byte BOOL X MX QX IX P M L K F T X 1 only lowest bit of these is effective Byte B MB QB IB P M L K F T C D S W 1 WORD W MW QW IW P M L K F T C D S W DOUBLE WORD D MD QD ID P M L K F T C
19. QW IW P M L K F T C D S W DOUBLE WORD D MD QD ID LONG WORD L YML QL IL 7 48 Chapter 7 Communication function Ex 1 If memory type included in direct variable name of computer request format is W WORD and the data number of computer request format is 03 the data number of PLC ACK response after execution of command is indicated by H06 2 03 06 Byte Byte which is entered in ASCII code value 3036 Values of ASCII code converted from HEX data are in data area Ex 2 In just above example if data contents of 3 WORDs data are 1234 5678 and 9ABC in order actual ASCII code converted value are 31323334 35363738 39414243 and the contents are to be entered in data area 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response Command Error code Frame H10 R r SB H1132 ETX BCC ASCII v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see Appendix B Error Code Table 4 Example of use In case 2 DOUBLE WORDs from MD0O address of station No 10 are read supposing that data below are in MD0 and MD1 MDO H12345678 MD1 H9ABCDEFO Computer request format Header Station
20. and sent Surely send upload command within sec after receiving this frame 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response Station Error code Header Command Command type Tail Frame check ae eaf a a H 3 face H3130 H50 70 H554E H31313332 v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format ASCII value BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error 4 Example of use In case Domain name is set to PLC_pgm Computer request amet O mem ASCII value paea H3031 H50 70 H554E H3037 H504C435F52570676D a 7 90 Chapter 7 Communication function For PLC ACK response after execution of command In case DOMAIN SIZE is 12345 Bytes Stati No rae Ex T 10012345 ASCII value H3031 H50 70 H444E H3030303132333435 hek v Surely perform upload command within 1 sec after receiving PLC ACK response as a result of the execution of this command service or startcommand will be invalid Consequently startcommand shall be executed again to upload again For PLC NAK response after execution of command Station No ame Ex i Eror code yao Hooo Hssae eror code wos ASCII value 7 91 Chapter 7 Communication function C1
21. e f the value which is smaller than max cycle of TX RX is set communication error may occur User defined If set to master it can be main body in communication system and if set to slave it just master slave responds to request frame of master 7 26 Chapter 7 Communication function B Frame setting If one of user defined items of protocol and transmission mode in communication parameters is selected registration list button is activated Press registration list button to display the figure below Mot defined 3 Mot defined Mot defined Mot defined Mot defined Mot defined Mot defined Mot defined 5 Mot defined Select ttem 0 15 of frame list and double click on it to display the figure below 7 27 Chapter 7 Communication function v Frame specification gt Header Use the form of Header What Is available for Header is 1 English character 1 figure or NUL H00 STX H02 ETX HO3 EOT H04 ACK H06 NAK H15 SOH HO1 ENQ H05 BEL HO7 BS H08 HT HO9 LF HOA VT HOB FF HOC CR HOD SO HOE S1 HOF DLE H10 DC1 H11 DC2 H12 DC3 H13 DC4 H14 SYN H16 ETB H17 CAN H18 EM H19 SUB HIA ESC H1B FS H1C GS H1D RS H1E US H1F or DEL H7F only as of control character
22. select Convert to convert ASCII data to HEX 7 17 Chapter 7 Communication function Set only 2 segments because the frame of Table 7 7 is composed of either CONST or ARRAY Next is the setting result screen CONST i AD24 ARRAY SetTail and BCC Select BCC setting button and set the range of SUM1 in dialog box for BCC setting to H 0 T 0 in order to set BCC as added from Header to Tail Refer to Chapter 5 Frame Editor for details of BCC setting Next is BCC setting screen H O T 0 Registration result of Read data frame data is shown in Figure 7 8 To receive the frame prepared as in the figure a program is to be prepared in GMWIN program via RCV_MSG Function Block so to save the received data to optional area of PLC Figure7 8 Setting screen of Read data frame Receive a bie AEA Tai JIETXIBCC BCC Setting 7 18 Chapter 7 Communication function 3 Registration of Immediate response frame Immediate response frame of the structure as in Table 7 8 is registered according to the sequence below Select the 3 item of frame list in Frame Editor and input the identical IMM RESPONSE with the input name as an immediate response frame when Setting the received frame in frame name And then select SEND in TX RX and input data below to Header Next is the input result The Jh Main Frame MM_RESPONSE ACK Input segment Since frame body of Tab
23. 0 Connectors for connection with digital 1 0 For extended connector module and special module 3 12 Chapter 4 Performance specification Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 1 Operation mode setting The operation mode of this module is set with operation mode switch on the front and interlocking stand alone mode or operation mode for each channel is determined according to the operation mode Setting method of operation mode is after selecting required mode adjusting switch values of operation mode with power off set by power on Operation mode Is unchangeable even if switch values of operation mode are changed during operation so surely after power off change the Switch values Table4 1 amp Table4 2 describe the operation modes according to switch values Table4 1 Operation mode of G3L CUEA G4L CUEA Remark RS 232C RS 422 User defined communication User defined communication Interlocking Dedicated communication Dedicated communication modelNotel User defined communication User defined communication 631 CUENGAL CUEA Flash writing mode Noted On line mode Ver 2 0 Notes Table4 2 Operation mode of G6L CUEB G6L CUEC Switch value Switch type of operation Operation mode mode 7 8 User defined communication defined communication aa G6L CUEC doesn t line Dedicated communication 4 Support GMWIN service mode GMWIN service Supports only G6L _ Off line Dedicated communication Dedic
24. 2 Print circuit drawing and list with printer 3 Write program to memory module as required 10 7 Chapter 10 Installation and Testing operation 10 2 Maintenance and Check To keep this communication module always as optimized perform daily and regular check 10 2 1 Daily check Daily check to perform is as described as below Table 10 3 Daily check items Check item Check contents Action to take Cable connection status Cable loosened Shall not be loosened Tighten cable l Module tightening Tighten module Module connection status Shall not be loosened screw loosened screw System operation LED Dimly On Abnormal if Off or flashing brightly cos a See Appendix 7 SYS RUN checked while interfacing with CPU Channel operation LED Only if channel active LED lights On 0 RS 232C RUN On checked data is normally sent received See Appendix 8 RS 422 485 RUN If Off communication stopped Communication error LED ae Abnormal if flashing 5 RS 232C ERR Off checked See Appendix parameter setting or cable abnormal 13 RS 422 485 ERR TX RX LED Abnormal if Off 1 2 RS 232C TX RX Flash checked See Appendix hardware of module abnormal 9 10 RS 422 485 TX RX system error LED ee Off checked System abnormal if flashing See Appendix 15 SYS ERROR 10 8 Chapter 10 Installation and Testing operation 10 2 2 Regular check Check the below items for 1 2 times half yearly and take actions as below if requi
25. 422 is sent via channel RS 232C in reverse In interlocking mode main channel is automatically set to RS 232C data is transmitted received via channel RS 232C only and the data is received via channel RS 422 is automatically sent via channel RS 232C without receiving into Cnet I F module Figure4 1 Data flow in interlocking mode PLE CPU Data fl ow Remark Notel In interlocking mode data is transmitted recelved in accordance with setting values of channel RS 232C transmission spec and the transmission spec of RS 422 can be ignored Note2 In interlocking mode modem can not be connected to RS 232C During connecting modem it must be used only after setting to the stand alone mode In case that modem is set to be used in interlocking mode channel RS 232C is operated as in null modem mode Note3 GM6 and GM7 series don t support interlocking mode Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 1 2 Channel operation in stand alone mode In stand alone mode channels RS 232C and RS 422 are operated independently to allow simultaneous Tx Rx in Separate transmission specifications Therefore transmission specifications can be set per RS 232C and RS 422 channel and the operation is started stopped according to channels Data flow of each channel in stand alone mode is as below Figure 4 2 Data flow in stand alone mode re RS 232C channel RS 232C cable A PLC cpu RS 422 channel RS 422 cable TX Remark
26. 5 Frame Editor 10 Operation mode of remote Cnet I F module can be read via Frame Editor even though Cnet I F module is not in online mode Select Read button with slot number and connection stage set to remote in online mode change menu to display operation mode of remote Cnet I F module as below Online Change Mode x 11 The figure above shows that RS 232C is in GMWIN mode and RS 422 is set to user mode with Cnet I F module of PLC B in No 9 online mode 5 43 Chapter 6 System configuration Chapter 6 System configuration Various communication systems can be configured via this module in accordance with application fields This chapter describes examples of system configurations which are available or unavailable for the application fields 6 1 System configuration available 6 1 1 1 1 Connection no modem to PC PC and Cnet are connected via RS 232C or RS 422 channel in 1 1 connection system with PC or PLC not through modem Most PCs are operated as master stations and Cnet I F modules are operated as slave stations that respond the request of PC Since no modem is applied communication distance is max 15m via RS 232C channel and max 500m via RS 422 channel Operation mode of Cnet I F module shall be set as agreed with communication type of PG Figure 6 1 1 1 communication system with PC GLOFA PLC MMI S W RS 232C RS 422 Interface Module setting Type RS 232C RS 422 Channel mode Station No
27. 5 to communicate with slave station No 5 Figure 8 3 Communication program with slave station 5 Chapter 8 Exercising program 8 2 Communication system between Cnet I F modules using optical modem Optical modem is mainly used in communication with mobile body which is hard to communicate with via communication cable For communication with GLOFA PLC on mobile body in lineal motion like parking tower or GLOFA PLC which is fixed RS 232C RS 422 channel of the module shall be connected with optical modem Figure 8 4 shows communication system between GLOFA PLCs and with monitoring device via optical modem Figure 8 4 Optical modem communication system Monitoring device Cnet 1 station RS 232C OPTICAL MODEM MOBILE BODY U ser Defined Cnet 2 station Mode4 RS 232C User Defined OPTICAL MODEM 7 RS 422 interface Dedicated Mode E Cnet 3 station a RS 232C OPTICAL MODEM U ser Defined RS 4221 Deciicattedi Mbde 1 3 stations in Figure 8 4 as of the module mounted on the fixed PLCs installed respectively at 1 3 floors in the parking tower communicate with monitoring device via RS 422 channel and RS 232C channel communicates with station 4 on mobile body via optical modem Module on mobile body moves vertically and horizontally as mounted on flatcar for car lift Communication is performed with station 1 at 1st fl station 2 at 274 fl and station 3 at 3 fl via optical modem And only w
28. 7 Communication function Remark Note 1 Station No shall be input in Cnet Ver2 0 or later In case of earlier Ver setting of Station No is unnecessary Station No shall be set in frame editor F GMWIN tries remote connection and if remote connection is completed the following screen is displayed G This means that remote 1 stage connection is completed just like the connection status that RS 232C cable is connected as moved where all functions in On line menu are available Remark Note 1 For application of GMWIN after remote connection On line menu can be used as in local connection Functions for program download upload monitor are available Note 2 PLC control via modem depends much on modem performance and phone line status If phone line is in deficient status connection may be released In this case try re connection not immediately but in approx 30 seconds starting from 1 7 130 Chapter 7 Communication function H To release connection in remote connection status select Disconnect on On line menu to display Disconnect menu box as in the figure below indicating Disconnected I If connection is released normally Cnet I F module and GMWIN are changed to initial mode to allow re connection when tried again starting from clause No 1 G In addition to dedicated modem optical modem and wireless modem also can be used equally for connection between GMWIN and Cnet though communic
29. ASCII valu ar warn ason w aa EED v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format Y BCC When command is one of lower case w only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see 7 63 Chapter 7 Communication function Appendix B Error Code Table 7 64 Chapter 7 Communication function 4 Example of use In case 4 bytes of HAA15056F are written in QD0 0 0 of station No 1 Computer request format j i N F Header ee Command comman see Variable name Hl data Tail e EY length of data check H254442302E3 H414131353 ASCII value H3031 H57 77 H5342 H3038 H04 02E30 0353646 For PLC ACK response after execution of command Frame PEPA Ex ASC val as cot un a S R For PLC NAK response after execution of command Frame Poe Ex Error TN ASCH val Ste co asm Hse a an 7 65 Chapter 7 Communication function C Writing of named variables W This is a function to write data by using the name registered by registering variable name in access variable of PLC program Refer to technical spec of GLOFA GMWIN for the registration of variables 1 Request format PC gt PLC A For data type of non array Numb Command pees Var
30. At this time the followings are in the data area of ACK response frame HEX CODE H78563412 FODEBC9A ASCII CODE 3737353633343132 4630444542433941 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response For command types of array non array in common ae ee H r Command Command type Tail Frame check Frame R r H02 H17 H1132 Ex ASCII saie H15 H3130 H52 72 H3032 3137 H31313332 H03 7 54 Chapter 7 Communication function Station number commands type of command and number of blocks are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see Appendix B Error Code Table 4 Example of use In case data type of station No 10 is WORD and variable names of OUTPUT A and OUTPUT B are read Supposing that H1234 is entered in OUTPUT A and HA302 Is entered in OUTPUT B Computer request format Variable Variable Station Comman Command Number l gt Frame Header name ariable nama name ariable namel Tail No d type of blocks check length length 0 E oureura no ourure eor sco H52 H4F55545055 H4F55545055 ASCII value H05 H3041 H3032 H3032 H3038 H04 72 545F41 545F 42 For PLC ACK response after execut
31. D S W LONG WORDIL 4ML OL ll Pp Values of ASCII code converted from HEX data are in data area Ex 1 Data number of H04 ASCII code value H3034 indicates that 4 byte data in HEX is in the data DOUBLE WORD HEX data of 4 bytes is converted into ASCII code in data Ex 2 If the number of data is H04 and the data is H12345678 ASCII converted code value of this is 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 which is input in data area Namely the highest value comes first and the lowest last Remark Notes If data type is BOOL data read is indicated by one byte of HEX Namely if bit value is 0 it is indicated by H00 and if 1 itis indicated by H01 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response Error code Header Station No Command Command type Tail Frame check HEX 2 Byte ramet pe ASCII value azo saa H533 wae wos v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see Appendix B Error Code Table 7 45 Chapter 7 Communication function 4 Example of use In case 1 WORD from MW 20 of station No 1 and 1 WORD from QW0 2 1 address are read supposing that data of H1234 is in MW
32. Dedicated mode Dedicated mode Stand alone GLOFA PLC Cnet Other company s Other company s Fadl 0 31 channe dedicated mode dedicated mode 6 1 Chapter 6 System configuration 6 1 2 1 1 Dedicated modem connection to PC PC and the module are connected through dedicated modem via RS 232C channel in 1 1 connection system Most PCs are operated as master stations and Cnet I F modules are operated as slave stations that respond the request of PC Since modem is applied to go through RS 232C channel shall be set to dedicated modem for long distance communication Operation mode of this module shall be set as agreed with communication type of MMI PC Figure 6 2 Dedicated modem communication with PC GLOFA PLC Cnet ainda i Wet H i Dedicated modem Dedicated modem Cnet I F module can be operated in dedicated mode or other company s dedicated mode Module setting Type RS 232C RS 422 Channel mode Station No Dedicated mode Sene GLOFA PLC Cnet Not used Other company s emel 0 31 dedicated mode 6 2 Chapter 6 System configuration 6 1 3 Modem connection to PC amp Communication between Cnet I F modules PC and Cnet 1 station are connected through modem via RS 232C channel Cnet 1 station N station carry out communication between Cnets via RS 422 channel PC is operated via master station of Cnet 1 station Cnet I F module can connect with max 32 stations RS 422 485 communication 1 station of Cnet I F m
33. Domain name which is allocated when it is saved to PLC If the name is unknown use P_ DOMAIN v FILE SIZE means the file size execution file output to PADT BNO and ROM of GK to be downloaded This size shall be displayed in decimal Ex If size of BNO ROM is 38Kbytes FILE SIZE is Dec 00038000 v IfD has been used instead of N in command type DM_LEN and DM_NAME are unnecessary S If no name is required use D instead of N in command type 7 82 Chapter 7 Communication function BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 2 Response format for PLC of ACK response ASCII value ee l ae v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent Surely perform download command within 1 sec after PLC ACK response or start command will be invalid Consequently startcommand shall be executed again to download again 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response Error CODE Header Station No Command Command type Tail Frame check rome tx w mo oo wo m fen ce Ooms mo Homo wea Ha nos o o ASCII value v Stat
34. ETX After frame setting click on OK button in Frame 1 window to register the frame as in the figure below TXR User Defined 2 Not defined 4 Not defined S Not defined 6 Not defined 7 Not defined 8 Not defined 9 Not defined 110 Not defined 411 Not defined 112 Not defined 113 Not defined 114 Not defined 115 Not defined J Click on OK button to go to communication parameter setting and then click on OK button again to complete setting k Prepare program as in the figure and let it downloaded to GM7 basic unit of slave station Refer to user s manual of GMWIN for the details of programming and downloading Inthe program Function Block is used Prior to Function Block service double click on the item of GMWIN Included libraries to open Include Library window as below Click on Add A button to add COMM 7FB library and then press OK button Chapter 8 Exercising program Include Library linclude Library NRE clgmwin3 3eVlib comm 7fb GM IN for Windows c 4omwin3 JeWsource us Mel Fa f f f Frame 0 transmits 4 bytes value from MBO of master station to slave station lfFrame 1 is sent from slave station the value is saved in MB10 Refer to frame setting of Frame 1 The saved value of MB10 at this time is output to direct variable QB0 0 0 as reversed logically and the output value to direct variable QB0 0 0 is saved again to MBO Chapter 8 Exerc
35. Figurel 1 CPU O S Ver information Base OSlot 4pecial Module Info F f T iad ta ti f ENET m i Yal oh a Version information of Ver 1 7 b Version information of Ver 2 0 1 4 Chapter 1 Introduction 2 FLASH O S Ver check For Cnet I F module Ver 2 0 or later all functions to embody Cnet functions are saved in flash memory and version check and upgrade are available through Frame Editor Flash O S version can be checked by Frame Editor if CPU O S is of Ver 2 0 or later A Select flash memory information with Frame Editor after Online connection Cnet Frame Editor untitled frm Online Flash Memory T sai B Select slot number and O S on which Cnet I F module is mounted from the system information screen and click reading button to display the system information screen as below for version check of FLASH ROM System Infomation x o eon 1 5 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 2 Added functions introduction of Version2 0 Table1 2 shows configuration of main functions of Ver 2 0 Table1 2 Configuration of main functions added to Ver 2 0 Comparison between contents Ver 1 0 1 7 Ver 2 0 or later Items Remark On line Mode change Master functions of dedicated communication other company s communication driver built in Support of HEX input for constant edit Flash memory operation Operating mode of module is set via H W using switc
36. Flash if in communication On during receive via RS 422 Flash if in communication On during ACK transmission Off after NAK transmission ee i fe ERR Protocol error On during S O error Flash if in error On during NAK transmission Off after ACK transmission RS 485 On during RS 485 settng Off during RS 422 setting ee SYS RUN On dimly during interfacing with CPU of PLC 7 aa Flash if H W in erroriNotet ERR Flash per cycle of lsec if serious error occurs Remark Note1 It flashes if system H W error or serious S W error occurs and the error status is indicated with upper 4 Bit LED 0 3 For the details see A 1 3 LED indication specification during abnormal operation Table A 3 G7L CUEB G7L CUEC On if power is normally approved On if power approved G7L CUEC On during receive via RS 422 Flash in communication On during transmission via RS 422 Flash in communication A 2 Appendix 2 Station No transmission specifications indication when LED display switch pushed Station No and transmission specifications are indicated through the LED on the top of module by On Off of LED display switch in the front of computer link module When switch first pushed station No is displayed and when the Switch pushed again after switch release transmission specifications is displayed According to this sequence station No and transmission specifications are repeatedly displayed in sequence whenever the switch pu
37. after frame is received 0 Head device 5 characters as a starting address in PLC memory Q Number of devices Data length to read word unit Q Data Data appropriate for the number of devices specified 3 Frame edit Define 3 frames above through Frame Editor A Read request frame Read request frame as of TX frame is configured in CONST where no ARRAY type is applied Next is edit screen of Read request frame for transmission The Ith Main Frame pora CO CONST O1FFWRODO1O00C o l B Total Read response frame Response frame to Read request is defined by RX frame while ARRAY variable is set to saving area of RX data behind PLC No As in ASCII communication select Convert for data type to convert ASCII code into HEX value so to be received by PLC and enter 24 as RX data is in byte unit The 2th Main Frame fee RD DATA Heade STX tt oh ediate Re Chapter 8 Exercising program If RX frame is received set IMM ACK to immediate response to send IMM_ACK frame through immediate response from Cnet when RD_DATA is received Immediate response frame is described below C Immediate response frame Define IMM ACK frame as below for TX frame to send IMM_ACK frame from Cnet if RD_DATA frame is received The 3th Main Frame IMM_ACK ACK CONST O1FF Frame Editor screen where frame has been defined is as below After frame edit above is completed write frames and basic par
38. ama Pert arladle Gala Lo pyte ASCII code nae 15 A Q ENQ EOT as of control characters of ASCII code are used for Header and Tail Q WR command is used as Write command Q 18 byte of Write data is displayed using 18 in data length area Q 18 byte data is sent to transmission data area Q BCC calculates ASCII code values from Header to Tail as added in HEX however changeable with the variable data area per frame Remark Note ASCII code value displays the transmission data in HEX And H in front of each figure is a signal indicating HEX unit of HEX decimal figures not included in actually transmitted data B Table7 7 shows the structure of Read data frame Table7 7 Structure of Read data frame Trans sequence Header il Frame body l Frame type Header Tail BCC Command CONST Data ARRAY H03 Transmission fame STX R D 2 4 Ea a Variable data 24 byte ne 7 13 Chapter 7 Communication function Q STX ETX as of control characters of ASCII code are used for Header and Tall Q RD command is used as Read command Q 24 byte of Read data is displayed using 24 in data length area Q 24 byte data is sent to data area Q BCC calculates ASCII code values from Header to Tail as added in HEX however changeable with the variable data area per frame C Table7 8 shows the structure of Immediate response frame Immediate response frame as of response frame
39. communication parameter menu window Communicaton Parameter Read Status of Slave PLO Chapter 8 Exercising program Setparameters as below and click on OK button Communication method Protocol and mode l _ Parity Stop Communication Station No Baud rate Data bit User defined bit bit channel RS232C null 1 9600 1 modem or Slave RS 422 485 D Click on entry list button to display the figure below User Defined 40 Not defined 41 Mot defined 42 Not defined 13 Not defined 4 Not defined 15 Not defined 46 Mot defined Not defined 18 Not defined p 4 Not defined 110 Mot defined 111 Not defined 112 Not defined 13 Mot defined 114 Mot defined 415 Not defined Receive x ee SEND_FRAME i iso Chapter 8 Exercising program ter ENO Type ARRAY Field MBO Size 4 bytes F After setting press BCC setting button as BCC is set to tail and set BCC as in the figure below if BCC setting window is activated and then click on OK button BCC Setting Item Setting value ASCI SUM 2 H 0 T 0 namely from Head ENQ to Tail EOT None Apply masking with HFF through XOR G After BCC setting click on OK button in Frame 0 window to register the frame as in the figure below Chapter 8 Exercising program lserDelined o eS m U Receive 11 Not defined J2 Not defined 43 Not defined 14 Not defined 15 Not defined 46 Mot defined T Not def
40. communication system with other company s PLC Other company s PLC GLOFA PLC al z 2 pe pe gee See See D as ha BE ee l oe ee ee ee eee etree we ja CELLE PE FE Pi PAE Fi i eld dl a RS 422 literface A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A WRITE REQUEST FRAME sce eon oataaetytey fafa r B READ DATA FRAME isa fo 2 a oataaenyte ena cc C IMMEDIATE RESPONSE FRAME won fa 2 o r uca J8UD O1d Y40719 Nd s Auedwoo 1940 B STRUCTURE OF TX RX FRAME In Figure7 5 18 byte data shall be transmitted in format of A Write request frame from GLOFA PLC to other company s PLC and B Read data frame along with 24 byte data is transmitted from other company s PLC to GLOFA PLC If Read data frame is received correspondent response frame to this is transmitted in format of C Immediate response frame in this protocol Figure 7 5 shows data flow according to transmission sequence of frames BCC check data is transmitted as attached to the ends of Write Read frames Next is how to prepare frame and program in order to embody the protocol above in 7 12 Chapter 7 Communication function user defined mode 1 Description of protocol A Frame structure and contents of Write request frame are as shown in Table7 6 Table7 6 Structure of Write request frame Trans sequence Header Frame body Frame type Header BCC Command CONST Data ARRAY eno wea ae
41. con RO o l r EE o AA EA ATA EE ESAR A EE i DLE ISTX PO SoG Stes CONST C Read response frame Set RX frame to receive TX frame which responds to Read request in temperature controller The right figure shows setting screen of RX frame CON ACK is entered in frame name ARRAY segment in RX data area of temperature controller s response frame HEX in command CONST where is out of 00 and ARRAY in STATUS area as RX data is HEX 00 with STATUS value checked in PLC program Note1 Set RX data area to ARRAY and conversion option to None in order to allow RX data to be received in HEX value by PLC program Chapter 8 Exercising program Frame Name CONACK Tw Peeve wf Header DLETACK Immediate Response oe The 3th Main Frame we larry SPOT Type NONE oS _ Y Remark Notel HEX data of CONST segment can be set in an even number unit in frame edit If 00 is in CONST data setting is unavailable In this case set only 00 area to ARRAY 5 GMWIN programming After frame edit and download are completed prepare TX RX program via SND _MSG RCV_MSG in GMWIN for TX RX of the prepared frames Figure 8 21 shows TX RX program to read data of temperature controller It requests Read by transmission of Temperature Function Block in a cycle of 1 sec and receives its response frame to Response Function Block to save HEX data of STAUTS and temperature data of 24 bytes among RX data to RD DA
42. direct variables monitor registration monitor execution and PLC status reading are supported 7 40 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 2 4 Data type When direct variables and named variables are read written attention must be paid to data type of directand named variables to be read 1 Data type of direct variables Memory device type of GLOFA GM PLC M Internal memory Q Output I input Data type for directvariables is displayed next to an indicating character of direct variable Table7 12 List of data types of directvariables ata type xample Bit X use MX0 QX0 0 0 1X0 0 0 H58 k 1 awe B m soms10 080 0 0 6180 00 H57 WORD W ETE MW10 QW0 0 0 IW0 0 0 DOUBLE WORD OD nag MD10 QD0 0 0 1D0 0 0 LONG WORD H4C ML10 QL0 0 0 IL0 0 0 2 Data type of named variables To read write named variables data type is specified by command type Table7 13 List of data types of named variables Command type Command type Data type Data type ASCII value ASCII value H3030 UDINT H3042 BYTE H3031 ULINT H3043 WORD 13032 REAL 43044 pworo Hos Hos f iea ne 3005 woro Hoa Haos TME 43046 swt Hos aos DATE 13130 wr He Hoe 13131 DINT 43037 13132 LINT H3038 STRING 13133 USINT H3039 BLOCK H3134 UINT HOA H3041 7 41 Chapter 7 Communication function Array named variables specify values of command type according to data type of each array element as below
43. double word and the number of data is 5 it means that5 double words shall be let read BCC When command is one of lower case r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ENQ to EOT Is converted into ASCII and added to BCC v Name length of directvariable This indicates the number of name s characters that means direct variable which is allowable up to 16 characters This value is one of ASCII converted from HEX type and the range is from HOL ASCII value 3031 to H10 ASCII value 3130 vY Direct variable It means address of variable to be read actually in ASCII value within 16 characters Others than figure upper lower cases and are not allowed for this variable name Variable type available for continuous reading of direct variables is as follows according to PLC type Table7 17 Continuous variable area available to read ummon mwmw smowoom B QB IB W QW IW D QD ID Ls a te MB QB 1B YoMW QW olW MD QD ID Poem fe ree ree em us xo amu noms so i000 er re MB QB 1B AMW QW IW MD QD ID 1 47 Chapter 7 Communication function Remark Note 1 Refer to technical spec of GLOFA PLC for details to specify the area of device in GLOFA GM Note 2 Data type of LONG WORD Isn t supported in GM3 GM4 GM6 and GM7 Note 3 Continuous reading function of directvariables has not Number of blocks item in protocol 2 Response for
44. error cccrcc certs ce cee cecccsees cecccssseeeecccsees 11 3 11 2 2 Error code ERR 3 communication command ALLOY cece cscssscccceccccccccccsccccceccccccccssceces 11 5 TT 23 POr Code ERRA ERR S RECEIVE MO NntOr Gale OMOT ereer ti oe penpe Ena Eo eire 11 7 11 2 4 Error code ERR 6 ERR 7 Transmission monitor data error sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeseeeeees 11 8 11 2 5 Error code ERR 8 ERR 9 Error on dedicated communication sseeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeereseereeeees 11 9 11 2 6 Error code ERR 10 error on G MWIN connection cesecsocosoosooooooooocoooosooooooosoooooooooooo 11 11 Appendix Pere rere rrr reer ee eee ee eee eee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee A 1 A 15 A 1 LED indication specification TOPE eeTe ESTP ee Te Tee eee ee eee ee ee Tee eee eee eee ee Te Tee eee eee eee ee ee eee ee ee eee ee ee eee ee ee A 1 A 1 Applicable type Come e rece cece errr e cece seers eee sere sees esse eee esses eee ee eee eeeee eee eeeee esse eeseseeeeesseeeees A 1 A 1 2 LED indication specification during normal operation Cece cece crc ENE EEE EEEE EE EEEE ES A 1 A 1 3 LED Indication Specification during abnormal operation Peer rere ree eee eee eee ee ee eee eee ee ee eee ee ee ee A 5 A 1 4 LED indication specification during DOW Gi Oi A EEE ER RRE A 6 A 2 Error code table Cece meee cree cere cere cere e eee esses seers sees sees esses eee eee eee eee se eee sees esses eseeseeseseseees A 7 A 2 1 Error code for user defined communication ee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeesesesess
45. figure shows an example of structure based on RS 422 of Full Duplex Communication Since transmission terminal of the master station and receiving terminals of the Slave stations are connected to one line and transmission terminals of the slave stations are linked with receiving terminal of the master station the communication between slave stations is unavailable with the restricted function of multi master 13 BCC Block Check Character As serial transmission may have signals distorted due to noise in transmission line BCC is used as data to help receiving side to check the signals if normal or distorted and to detect errors in signals as compared with the received BCC after calculating BCC by receiving side itself using the data input to the front terminal of BCC 14 GMWIN function This is the function to remotely perform programming reading writing user s program debugging and monitor ing etc without moving the physical connection of GMWIN in the network system where PLC is connected to Cnet I F module Especially it is convenient to control a remote PLC via modem net i iz i RS 232C S seese TTT RS 232C Cable LETE Modem l Modem Aerial circuit Aerial circuit Relay station GMWIN Programming software of GLOFA PLC for Windows 15 Frame Frame is composed of transmitted and received data as in a specified form in data communication including additional information of segment station No commands
46. for RS 232C and RS 422 according to modes while operated by slave only in the system composed of master and slave to respond only when requested by external devices All frames used in dedicated communication mode shall not exceed 256 byte with characters of ASCII code used for all the frames For multi drop service max 32 stations can be connected Be careful not to allow repeated station No to be set to the same network when setting station No Communication speed Stop Bit Parity Bit Data Bit of all the Cnet I F modules in network shall be surely identical when used in multi drop Table 7 9 Switch value of Cnet mode which can be set to dedicated communication mode m Mode Operation mode r Module name Pe RS 93 RS A9 emar Dedicated mode Dedicated mode Interlocking mode Note 11 Dedicated mode G3L CUEA User defined communication Dedicated communication G4L CUEA Dedicated communication medon OOO omm Dedtatedmode o edictedmode G6L CUEB GOL CUEC 1 G 7L CUEB a N A Dedicated communication slave mode Set by GMWIN G 7L CUEC Remark Note 1 In interlocking mode RS 232C and RS 422 channels are operated via identical station set to RS 232C channel Note 2 In stand alone mode RS 232C and RS 422 channels are operated via different station numbers res pectively 7 35 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 2 2 Frame structure 1 Basic structure A Request frame External communication devices Cnetl F mod
47. function suitable to multi drop configuration connectable up to 32 units is provided Q With modem communication function built in remote PLC can be controlled by GMWIN connection dedicated communication and user defined communication Q Communication port RS 232C RS 422 RS 485 can be used by setting it to stand alone or interlocking channel Q Various communication speeds can be setfrom 300bps to 76 800bps Q 1 1 1 N N M communication if RS 422 channel used is available Q Communication types of full duplex RS 422 RS 232C and half duplex RS 485 are supported Q Channel RS 422 can be used as multi drop communication channel RS 485 by basic parameter setting Q Modules can be mounted up to 8 units for GM1 GM2 and GM3 4 units for GM4 and GM6 and 1 unit for GM7 available only on the main base And as linked with the basic module using an extended connector in case of GM7 Q With satisfactory self diagnosis function and Loop Back diagnosis function diagnosis of errors is easy to make Q With private functions of other products built in access is easy to such protocol as Modbus A B DF 1 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Module selection per CPU type As 4 types of the modules are developed according to CPU types appropriate module shall be selected for CPU type and its service Tablel 1 describes selection guide of module per CPU type Table1 1 Module selection per CPU type Number of Max number CPU type Module
48. name Configuration supported me em sa o o o o o me eae d GLOFA GM2 RS 232C RS 422 cioracms cacuea 2 RS232cRs4aa2 GLOFA GM4 RS 232C RS 422 G6L CUEB a RS 232C G6L CUEB RS 422 G7L CUEB i os RS 232C GLOFA GM7 eucuec 1 rs a22 Remark GLOFA GM6 Notel RS 422 channel only is available if mounted on duplicated base Note2 This module can not be mounted on an extended base but on the basic base only Note3 However it can be mounted on slots No 0 3 of duplicated extended base for 8 slots with max 8 modules 1 2 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 Functions of Version 2 0 This module has been operated in various application fields at home and abroad since released along with steady increasing performance via continuous Version Up to answer the diverse requests of customers and to reinforce the reliability Cnet I F module has performed functional upgrade to Ver 2 0 reflected by the diverse requests of customers on the basis of convenience compliance and flexibility for users Cnet I F module Ver 2 0 has been designed so kept along with the lower versions of products for functional compliance to use the established functions as same as 100 Thus refer to this user s manual for only added functions 1 2 1 Version check 4 O S versions of Cnet I F module are classified into CPU ROM O S Ver and Flash Memory O S Ver with the differences below 0 8 Type Ver 1 7 orless p l Performs all module Func
49. of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 7 95 Chapter 7 Communication function 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response Station mz Command Command type Error code HEX 2 Bytes ASCII value amea mak mo f n ew me Sea ee ms 0 noo se vam e v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error 4 Example of use In case Domain name is set to PLC_pgm Computer request err F Header canara EEN DM_NAME pu type PI rae f a wor Picon ASCII value SF H3031 H50 70 H454E H3037 H504C435F52570676D ape For PLC ACK response after execution of command Frame Head C d Command type Se alive FAF iier aaa A548 e For PLC NAK response after execution of command ed Frame Header Command Command type Error code Tail check IEY OoOo mw w ete ace Frame E O isc ei eee 7 96 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 3 Dedicated communication master communicatio
50. setting to display dialog box for modem initializing 7 127 Chapter 7 Communication function F lf COM port of modem Is incorrectly set or connection with modem is abnormal the following error message is displayed In this case inspect COM port or modem connection G If telephoning is completed GMWIN tries remote connection automatically and if remote connection is completed program Write and Run Stop icon menus are activated as below H This means that remote 1 stage connection is completed just like the connection status that RS 232C cable is connected as moved where all functions in On line menu are available Remark Note 1 For application of GMWIN after remote connection Online menu can be used as in local connection Functions for program download upload monitor are available Note 2 PLC control via modem depends much on modem performance and phone line status If phone line is in deficient status connection may be released In this case try re connection not immediately but in approx 30 seconds starting from 1 H To release connection in remote connection status select Disconnect on On line menu to display Disconnect menu box as in the figure below indicating Disconnected 7 128 Chapter 7 Communication function If connection is released GMWIN hangs up the phone automatically to disconnect it If the phone is hung up normally local and remote modem is restored to initia
51. take Verify input to FNAM Enter SLOT _NO value correctly Check operation status of Cnet I F module of assigned slot Check input parameter Verify receive frame of self station or transmission frame of other station again Verify whether Cnet I F module is user defined communication mode Perform operation RUN with frame editor Menu Online Run Stop Reconcile frame names in frame editor and frame entered in FNAM 1 Download frame again 2 Check if CPU is normal or not 1 Verify receive frame again 2 Verify other station s transmission frame again Download frame Appendix Meaning Input to FNAM isn t present or more than 16 figures Error occurs during conversion ASCII e HEX Array size specified in frame editor and data size specified in LEN used in commu nication command do not fit each other Incorrect frame definition Frame has not been downloaded from frame editor Operation mode is not user defined commu nication mode A 8 Action to take Verify input to FNAM Verify whether received data is ASCII or HEX again Confirm data size again and fit it Data size is Byte value 1 Verify contents of appropriate frame again with frame editor 2 Download frame again Download frame Correctly fit mode switch User defined communication mode For the details see 4 1 Operating mode setting Appendix A 2 2 Error code for dedic
52. that the frame if received is normally received Once if the immediate response is selected and transmitted frame just like the response frame name is registered the transmitted frame which is registered as immediate response frame Is transmitted automatically even though SEND function block isn t used in PLC Figure 5 8 describes the immediate response function Chapter 5 Frame Editor Figure 5 8 How to use immediate response RECEIVE Other s RECEIVE communication device Nd D 1d VAO TD a Immediate response if not selected transmits response frame by PLC programming for transmission RECEIVE RECEIVE Other s communication Nd Dld VAOTD device mediate response ed transmits applicable response frame immec Cnet I F module Programming in PLC is unnecessary If immediate response frame has been set the same transmitted frame as the setting name shall be defined ARRAY data cannot be transmitted in the transmitted frame of immediate response D Set received frame per segment Setting is same as in transmitted frame however such ARRAY variable names in variable data area shall be surely used as RD1 RD2 RD3 and RD4 When PLC programming data entering variable data area is received in RD1 RD4 while RCV_MSG function block is being input It means that the data in setting area to RD1 array of Frame Editor among the received frames from the other station is let saved in ARRAY variable setto RD1 of R
53. to open communication parameter menu window He eee f i i pora E f a es E AK et ETEY Sate f fe ele aa ibe SEJ fi f Chapter 8 Exercising program Set parameters as below and click on OK button on Protocol and Communication method mode Data Panty Communication Station No Baud rate Dedicated bit bit channel RS232C null modem or RS422 485 D Prepare program as in the figure below and let it downloaded to GM7 basic unit of slave station Refer to user s manual of GMWIN for the details of programming and downloading GM IN for Windows c Wgmwing J3eWsource ded_slave prj c amwin3 3eWsourceWded_sly t ei fea Ben yee et re tc Wgmwin3 3eWsourceWded_slave pri F PROJECT PLC Type GM CONFIGURATION lt PLC gt gt Configuration Mame UNNAMED E ACCESS VARIABLES gt O variables declared RESOURCECCPU gt D A Name RESO B RESOURCE GLOBA O variables declared B TASK DEFINITIO 1 tasks defined DISA E 1 PROGRAM 8 47 Chapter 8 Exercising program 2 Communication parameter setting and program of master station A Perform operations in master station No 1 B Create new project file and new program for master station eB GMWIN for Windows c Wamwin3 3eWsourceWded_ master pi Tj Womwin3 JeWsourceWded_master prj P PROJECT PLC Type GM COMFIGURATIONCPLC gt Configuration Mame UNNAMED E ACCESS VAR
54. transmit receive frame prepared via Frame Editor TX RX program shall be prepared in GMWIN using Function Block Next is how to program in GMWIN to run communication system of Figure 7 5 A Transmission program Figure 7 10 shows an programming example to transmit Write request frame WR_REQ Figure7 10 Example of transmission programming Transmission cycle setting 1 second timer Transmission frame name TX data area SD1 defines PLC memory area to be sent to SD1 registered to ARRAY in Frame Editor ARRAY number shall be set at least the same as the number to transmit which is registered in frame with data type set to USINT ARRAY WR_REG FNAM Transmission channel number No 1 RS 422 As of data number to transmit it needs to be set as the transmission number registered via Frame Editor As ARRAY area is just one in Frame Editor set SD2 4 to default values and LEN2 4 to 0 in order to protect compile error Figure 7 10 is an example of transmission programming via SND_MSG Function Block As for transmission if data is to be transmitted in other words if segment is applied set to ARRAY in frame registration PLC area where data Is to be transmitted to SD area of transmission Function Block shall be set to USINT ARRAY with the number set as many as required for the transmission 7 21 Chapter 7 Communication fun
55. user s manual of each PLC type Communication cable Is the connection status of communication cable normal connection IS each cable connected in open loop type only if cable is connected Refer to 10 1 2 Cautions during system configuration l Is the mounting status of communication module on basic base normal Module mounting Refer to 10 1 1 Mounting and installation Is the mode switch set correct Switch setting Is the frame defined as set correct 10 6 Chapter 10 Installation and Testing operation 2 Sequence of testing operation Next is the sequence starting from PLC installation completed to testing operation Poweron A Confirm input power B Check communication cable connection C Power on D Check if power LED of power module is turned on E Check LED status of CPU module f abnormal refer toTroubleshooting in user s manual of each PLC type F Check if LED status of communication module is normal or not f abnormal refer to Chapter 11 Troubleshooting in this user s manual Frame definition Define frame with frame definition and download to communication module Programming Perform programming in GMWIN and download to CPU module Sequence check Confirm the operation of communication module according to program Program modification If abnormal in sequence program modify it Program preservation 1 Save program to floppy or hard disk
56. well informed of protocol operation prior to configuration of frame and program Chapter 7 Communication function 2 Introduction of transmission operation User defined mode is normally operated when TX RX frame list written via Frame Editor and TX RX Function Block of GMWIN program are agreed with each other Figure7 2 Setting example of transmitted data The Ith Main Frame Ti TiS SNOLNSB jp REL g SLOT_NO SLOT EFR HO TX DATA 2 TX DATA 3 TX DATA 4 I I ca m co co EOT BCC a Frame writing of Frame Editor b Ex of GMWIN program Figure7 2 shows an example of writing Frame Editor and transmission Function Block of GMWIN program for setting of transmission frame If transmission frame is edited in Frame Editor the frame name and the number of transmitted data Shall be written identically in SND _MSG transmission Function Block of GMWIN program for the applied frame transmission The frame written in Frame Editor takes the role of matching transmission protocol and the transmission Function Block of GMWIN program takes the role of sending transmission data Data set in transmission Function Blocks of SD1 SD4 is transmitted as included in ARRAY area of the frame registered in Frame Editor thus transmission Function Blocks agreed with the number of transmission frames shall be written also with the number of data and the frame name as exactly agreed in order to perform transmission
57. 104 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 3 4 Dedicated communication master for G7L CUEC 1 Introduction This system can be configured easily by setting of basic parameters and communication parameters in GMWIN Main functions are as follows Q Setting of total 64 data access blocks and communication time out interval of each block is available in a unit of WORD for input l outout Q and internal memory M areas Q Renews the flag related with operation mode and error code of slave PLC according to parameter setting Q Renews the flag related with the number of TX RX error and error code of each parameter Master station Response frame 2 Data loss a A Response mre P frame 3 n D L 4 7 SZEN NZEA Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3 Slave 4 b Data crash in RS 422 system Q Monitors communication status according to parameters through monitor function of GMWIN 2 Parameter setting A Setting of communication parameters Q Open new project file in GMWIN v Select surely PLC type of GM7 v Create new project files for master and slave respectively 7 105 Chapter 7 Communication function Q Select communication parameter in GMWIN parameter and double click on it to display the figure below Communicaton Parameter l 7 106 Chapter 7 Communication function Q Setting contents as below Item Setting contents Self station No Setting is available from 0 to 31 station Communication ace 1200
58. 12 Chapter 4 Performance specification errr rere eee ee eee eee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee 4 1 4 33 4 Operating mode setting Cee rr eer cece cere cere cee r sees seers sess sees sees seers sesseeesseessessssessseseees 4 4 1 1 Channel operation in interlocking MOE teeeeeeseeseesecooesooooseoooseoooososososooooosooooseoososoes 4 3 4 1 2 Channel operation IN stand alone mode cecesrccccrsssccscessseeeeeeeseeeeccsssceeccsssseeeccssseseeees 4 4 Alo Ghannenoperaion n self olagnosSis mode LOOP BACK i reneiprereddiee saai 4 5 4 2 Method of serial interface s eeeeeeeeeeeeeesseesesssecesosossoseooooooososseooooosososesooooosososeooeo 4 6 4 2 1 RS 232C interface cerrrc recs rset rete eee ee terete eseeeeee esse reser eesesesssessesesesessressssesseeees 4 6 4 2 2 RS 422 interface er re E E ee ree re E ree ree E E EES ee yr ears 4 9 43 How to set transmission Specifications CTT errr eT Tere eee ee ee ee ee re Te ee ee ee eee ee ere ee 4 1 4 3 1 Setting items eesecsoosocooooooooocooosoooooooosoosoooooooosoooooooosocooosoooooooosooooooooooosoooooooooo 4 11 4 3 2 HOW tO S t eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeecccooooseeeoecooooeoeeecooooooeeececooooeoeeecoooooooeeeeccoooooeeeeeeeooooe 4 12 4 3 3 Reading setting values seeeeeseseseesesccsososeoooososoooooessoooosesooooosososoosesoooooeseooooeeeoos 4 16 4 3 4 Transmission specification setting OF GMT SerieS eeeeeeeseeeeesccooessesoooooosooooooooeeoooosoee 4 17 4 4 How to connect to modem Cee meer reer cere ce
59. 2 Communication of the testdata shall be as specified in Tx Rx specification user has set Chapter 9 Diagnosis function 9 2 Diagnosis during power on Cnet I F module performs self diagnosis test and checking of PLC CPU amp interface as in the sequence below Table 9 4 Checking sequence when powered on 3 3 Se S icme fowo 1 Upon being powered on all module s LEDs are turned ON for approx 1 sec and then OFF to check LED display The LED if not turned on during the first lighting ON is in error 2 After LED check LEDs from No 1 to No 5 are turned ON by turns to execute self diagnosis and checking of PLC CPU amp interface 3 LED display during self diagnosis and PLC Interface test is turned ON according to the sequence below 0 gt 1 gt 2 gt 324 gt 85 4 After self diagnosis is over in the sequence above it is switched to the LED display status of normal operation mode according to operation mode and basic setting to start normal operation 5 If not agreed with the displaying specification of self diagnosis check connection amp installation status of base slot and then supply power again 6 If still operated as not agreed with the LED display items above even for normal installation of module the applied module hardware seems in error Please contact service station Remark Notel When Operation mode check in sequence 7 of self diagnosis checking sequence is applied as powered on LED No 5 is tu
60. 2 shall be used in consideration of communication distance and speed Table 3 3 describes recommended specifications of cable Also when using other cable than recommended the cable conformed to characteristics in Table 3 3 shall be used Q Item Low Capacitance LAN Interface Cable Q Type LIREV AMESB Q Size 2P X 22AWG D 0 254 TA Q Manufacturer LG Cable Co Ltd Table 3 3 Specifications of twisted pair cable 1 Electric characteristics Test item Characteristics Test conditions Conductor resistance Normal temp Withstands for 1 min Insulation resistance 1 000 or more Normal temp Static electricity capacity Pf M Characteristics impedance Q o 120 12 10MHz 2 Characteristics of appearance Item Solid cable Stranded cable Core number Cou Size Composition 1 0 64 710 254 Outer dia i Thickness Outer dia Figure 3 1 Structural drawing Conductor Insulator AL MYLER Tape E Ground l Braided material 3 4 Chapter 3 Product specification 3 4 Terminating resistance For communication via RS 422 channel terminating resistance from external must be connected Terminating resistance has the function to prevent distortion of signal by reflected wave of cable for long distance communication and the same resistance 1 2W as characteristic impedance of cable must be connected to terminal of network When using the recommended cable in 3 3 connect terminating resistanc
61. 20 and data of H5678 is in QW0 2 1 Computer request format Station Command Number of Variable Variable Frame Header Command Variable name Variable nama Tail type blocks Length length check ramel nwa go H255157302E ACSII value H05 H3031 H52 72 H5353 H3032 H3035 H254D573230 H3038 H04 322E31 For PLC ACK response after execution of command Station Command Number of Variable Variable Frame Header Command Variable name Variable nama Tail type blocks length length check ramalEx 1234 1567 ie e H3031 H52 72 H5353 H3032 H3032 H31323334 H3032 H35363738 j _ For PLC NAK response after execution of command Station Command Frame Header Command Error code Tail type check PER Ex ste ain ee ea ace acsi vawe nis naos sare sss ee A 7 46 Chapter 7 Communication function Continuous reading of direct variables RSB This is a function to read PLC device memory directly specified in accord with memory data type Itis convenient command to continuously read data up to 120 bytes in continuous areas from the specified address 1 Request format PC gt PLC Comman Station Variable Variable Number of data Header Command d No length name Max 120 byte type ASCII H254D44 H05 H3130 H52 72 H5342 H3036 H3035 value 313030 Remark Note 1 Number of data specifies the number according to the type of direct variable Namely if data type of direct variable is
62. 22 Dedicated mode Station No 0 3 WNote5 Other company s dedicated Remark Notel Basic value means the basic value as set as released from the factory Note2 76800bps is provided for RS 422 RS 485 channel and serviceable in module Ver 1 3 or later Speed of RS 232C channel is allowed up to 38400bps Note3 Modem mode can be set only if in operation mode separate If in interlocking mode it is operated with null modem mode Note4 If set to RS 485 RS 422 channel is converted to half duplex communication mode Note5 Station No is valid only in dedicated mode and other company s dedicated mode and can be set differently according to each channel of RS 232C RS 422 In user defined and GMWIN modes station No set is insignificant 4 11 Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 3 2 How to set Transmission specifications are set by Frame Editor with the setting sequence as below 1 Run Frame Editor in Windows 2 The following initial setting screen is displayed Cnet Frame Editor untitled frm Selection area of communication channel Setting area of basic parameter Setting area of user defined frame 3 Select communication channel to set in the above screen 4 Select communication type referring to the table below Table 4 4 Example of criteria for selection of communication type Communication Communication Selection criteria channel type ae For communication with remote PC or remo
63. 3036 H30304646 H04 3330 For PLC ACK response after execution of command lied Ex ISCI ali D TEE M go usn a aa D For PLC NAK response after execution of command ene Ex Error ia ascu sj ao ason ss a 7 61 Chapter 7 Communication function Cl Continuous writing of direct variables WSB This is a function to directly specify PLC device memory and continuously write data from specified address as long as specified 1 Request format PC gt PLC N f Station Command Variable variable amoeno f g Header NO Command a ee bres data Tail yP 3 Max 120Byte Frame Ex MD10 ENQ H10 W w SB H06 H01 H11112222 0 H254D4 ASCII H313131313 H05 H3130 H57 77 H5342 H3036 431303 H3031 H04 value 2323232 0 BCC Note 1 Number of data specifies the number according to the type of direct variable Namely if data type of direct variable is double word and the number of data is 5 it means that5 double words shall be witten BCC When command is one of lower case w only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ENQ to EOT Is converted into ASCII and added to BCC v Number of blocks The protocol of continuous writing function of directvariables has not Number of blocks v Name length of directvariable This indicates that the number of name s characters that means direct variable is allowable up to 16 characters This value is one of ASCII convert
64. 6 Type of communication drivers Applicable module AB34 LIB G3L CUEA G4L CUEA AB Asynchronous Link Full Duplex communication driver AB6 LIB G6L CUEB G6L CUEC MODBUS 34 LIB G3L CUEA G4L CUEA MODBUS ASCII RTU communication driver MODBUS6 LIB GOL CUEB G6L CUEC Communication driver file agreed with the service shall be downloaded however the number of downloads is not restricted In other words a module used in AB Asynchronous Link Full Duplex can be used in MODBUS communication mode if MODBUS communication driver has been downloaded 2 How to download communication driver Correspondent communication driver file is to be downloaded for the service in other company s dedicated mode as selected among the files in Table 7 26 If incorrect file is selected and downloaded normal operation of Cnet I F module isn t allowed Next is how to download other company s communication driver via Cnet I F module A If Cnet mode switch is set to Write flash mode and then PLC is powered on LED No 0 of Cnet I F module flashes in a cycle of lsec 7 113 Chapter 7 Communication function B If Open library file menu is selected from higher file menu after On line connection with Frame Editor executed the following screen to Open library file is displayed where applicable directory and desired LIB file is selected to display information about the applicable file in File Information The figure below shows the case that AB34 LI
65. 7 3 Chapter 7 Communication function 3 Introduction of receiving operation Figure 7 3 Setting example of received data The 2th Main Frame Bich Tis RCY MSG JPY RED NOR eo o o o S SLUT_MO SLUT ERR N m O a FRAME NAME LH CH oll AITE FNANLENI ww en O e eE RX DATA 2 5 Bp LENG a RDS LEN4 aay go gt AAA a Rod RX DATA 4 Fi 5 Ere a Frame writing of Frame Editor b Ex of GMWIN program Figure 7 3 shows a setting example for frame receiving Frame name and saving area of received data shall be set in RCV_MSG receiving Function Block of GMWIN program also for data receiving similar to transmission The frame written in Frame Editor takes the role of matching receiving protocol and the receiving Function Block of GMWIN program takes the role of saving data of the applied frame received via Cnet I F module to receiving data areas of RD1 RD4 RD data Saving area of receiving Function Block as of ARRAY variable has no setting for data length differently from the transmission Function Block and defines data receiving area by setting the number of ARRAYS identically to the number of received data 7 4 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 1 3 User defined Function Block SND MSG RCV_MSG Users are required to use Cnets dedicated TX RX Function Blocks for the definition of communication frames via Frame Editor and for communication in PLC program via the define
66. ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v PI N_ LEN is allowable within H01 H10 2 Response format for PLC of ACK response tame tex ace o ascivane ne wo woe new one a a v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case m only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 7 80 Chapter 7 Communication function 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response Error code H tation N mman mmand t Tail Frame check se eee a lee eee worms Leese ASCII value sje ao woen weu H3113 es v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format Y BCC When command is one of lower case m only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see Appendix B Error Code Table 4 Example of use In case PI name is setto PLC_RUN Computer request format cnec pete a uc RUN ASCII value Shee H3031 H4D 6D H444E H3037 H504C435F52554E ot For PLC ACK response after execution of command ea a ETE pscivane Hos osi tn jse a ee For PLC NAK
67. ASIC PARAMETERS B COMMUNICATION PARAMETER INCLUDED LIBRARIES F RESOURCE GLOBALS A variables declared ci Hgmwind JetHsourcetmonameli2 src O variables declared 2 Select communication type of the communication parameter in accordance with the contents to set Communicaton Parameter Setting area of basic parameters of GM7 om orl 4 17 Chapter 4 Performance specification 3 Select self station number communication speed parity bit data bit stop bit and communication channel of Cnet F module to communicate among items in communication type 4 If parameter setting of communication type is completed enter protocol and transmission mode below and then select writing of communication parameter for program pee GL eel dol asl caliper ene Gis PARE h Ea obeys Lal pet pte e p sled Peace ea ee ccna er Pars eee RE OTIC el Cy Tete TEN gastos ee SE genie 5 Start and execute the correspondent program after writing is performed 4 18 Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 4 How to connect to modem Cnet I F module has a function for long distance communication via RS 232C channel using public line How to connect to public line using Cnet I F module is as follows 1 Dedicated modem communication via dedicated line 2 Dial up modem communication via normal telephone line Since these two types of communication differ from each other according to characteristics of the line they shall be used with mo
68. ATA ai Bl DATA AMBA00 DATA LE RD DATA IR Function Block program for dedicated commu nication master Specify input variables as below with GM RD Function Block for READ and GM WR Function Block for WRITE SLOT NO Where the module is mounted CH Channel setting ST_NO Slave station No VAR Slave memory area DATA_LEN Data length DATA_RD RX data saving area DATA_WR TX data saving area Setting values of RD START variables used in interlock contact point are as follows Initial value as an auto variable is Set to 1 to execute GM_RD Function Block in the first scan Chapter 8 Exercising program Vari FH Instance HOOL FA Instance WWR_START WRITE READ MOR READ ERR etting values of WR_START variables are as follows Initial value is set to 0 in auto variable after GM_RD Function lock is executed by interlock program to allow GM_WR Function Block executed TE Laca ee FA Instance HODL FA Instance WR_START WRITE Chapter 8 Exercising program Program in Figure 8 2 has used GM_RD Function Block to read data and GM_WR Function Block to write data of Slave station No 0 To communicate the program in Figure 8 2 with slave station No 0 7 prepare each program with slot No and memory address set as agreed with Table 8 1 to complete communication programming of dedicated communication master Figure 8 3 shows dedicated communication program of master station slot No
69. A_ from MB1000 DATA to MB1000 to send 24 bytes data Chapter 8 Exercising program Figure 8 22 Write data program of temperature controller non ER ER ET EE SE TRE EN ETRE ERE EE EE ES ET Add Edit Variables After compile and link of programs in Figure 8 21 and Figure 8 22 let them downloaded to PLC CPU and run to start communication through the defined protocol Chapter 8 Exercising program 8 7 Example of using G7L CUEC 8 7 1 Dedicated communication master RS 422 485 COMMUNICATION CABLE a G7E prign CE CUEC GM7 BASIC UNIT G7L CUEC SLAVE STATION NO 31 The following describes the example of system configuration as above with GM7 basic unit operation n master GM7 basic unit data is changed through ROL Function and MOV Function in M area written to output contact of slave GM7 basic unit and then read again in master GM7 basic unit finally to be written to output contact of G7E DR10A which is extended digital I O module Chapter 8 Exercising program 1 Communication parameter setting and program of slave station A Perform operations in slave station No 31 B Create new project file and new program for slave station GM CONFIGURATION PLO gt Configuration Mame UNNAMED E ACCESS VARIABLES O variables declared RESOURCECCPU gt B Name RES B RESOURCE GLOBALS variables declared C Select communication parameter in GMWIN parameters and double click on it
70. B 01 H14 os ETX BCC a Remark Note1 Number of data in frame is in HEX unit B Frame edit Edit and download 4 frames above to module using Frame Editor Enter 4 frames as below Next is frame entry screen Chapter 8 Exercising program Write request frame GM_WR_REQ TX frame Frame Hame GM_WA Tx Ry send z Header ENG gt segment melt 7 oe ENR dee eae cre rien tarp eee eee Type CONST e o4wSB062MB 10028 Type NONE C HEX ASCII de Tae Segment 2 lee Segment 6 Type ARRAY _ I SD1 Type NONE f Convert None 31727 40 Segment 3 a Garb SU EO EAEE EEE cca A Se i Segment 7 AEAEE HE recta Pr bee Ber EEE Type NONE Type NONE gt Segment 4 ae mee ee es Segment 6 Type NONE H Type NONE H Tai EOT BCC BCC Setting Cancel Frame name above is GM WR entered as TX frame Station No command and variable as of CONST are registered in Segment 1 and data TX area of ARRAY type is specified in segment 2 As is in ASCII communication select Convert to convert TX data to ASCII figures BCC is added behind the tail as the lower case w is used in command with BCC type set as below BCC type is identical all for dedicated communication frames f ASCII Hex Check Rule t Default SUM 1 SUM 2 C XOR 1 XOR 2 t MUL C MUL 2 Range H O T 0 ex H O T O Complement NONE Mask ex FF C
71. B file is selected Open Lib File ab34 20_lib abs4y70lib ab6y20 lib modbus 1 lib modbus 2 lib Library File LIB Z AB DH Full Duplex Driver ER1 0 C Select AB34 LIB file in the figure and then click on OK D Select Write flash memory from sub menu of flash memory in On line menu of menu bar to display the following screen to Write library where slot number Cnet I F module is mounted on is to be selected and Write button Is to be selected to download library selected to flash memory Write Library Remark Note 1 Do not operate program such as escaping from Frame Editor while downloading to flash memory or from Windows program nor let PC or PLC powered off If OS data of flash memory is once damaged normal operation of Cnet I F module is unavailable A S shall be requested in this case 7 114 Chapter 7 Communication function E If library writing is completed the following message will be displayed Response NAF Q a G If library writing has been previously established library file information of Cnet I F module can be read Select Read flash memory of sub menu in flash memory from on line menu of menu bar to display the following screen where to read flash memory information Herein select applicable slot and library and then press Read to check the type and the version of driver downloaded in Cnet I F module System Infomation 7 115 Chapter 7 Communication functio
72. BUS protocol through GLOFA PLC of Cnet Ver 2 0 set to other company s dedicated mode for the service Application of MODBUS communication in Gm7 series from other models of Cnet I F modules Please refer to 8 3 MODBUS protocol communication in GM7 series manual for details LY MODBUS communication function is available only in Cnet I F module Ver 2 0 or later Q Cnet I F module operates as a server only in MODBUS however client operation is unavailable Q For MODBUS operation download MODBUS lib file first to Cnet I F module via Frame Editor Q Operation mode of Cnet I F module is to be set to other company s dedicated mode Q ASCII RTU modes among MODBUS protocols are supported simultaneously Q Basic parameters such as communication speed station No etc shall be set as agreed with the communication Specification of external devices Q Separate operation for each RS 232C RS422 channel is available 1 Basic specification Q Character protocol Start S top Data P arity setting available using Frame Editor Q Communication speed 300 38400 BPS available Q Channel operation Stand alone Interlocking operation available for RS 232C RS 422 channels Q Communication mode HEX communication RTU Mode ASCII communication ASCll Mode Q Frame check CRC check RTU Mode LRC check ASCll Mode Q Station No area 1 31 station available station 0 unavailable Q Data length Reading Writing of max 120 bytes available Q ASCII mode Commu
73. C and if No 0 bit input value of slot No 1 input module in GLOFA PLC is turned on 24 bytes data is read from MB1000 address and output to 12 channels of D A output module of temperature controller in this program example GLOFA Cnet I F module and temperature controller perform 1 1 communication via RS 232C channel in the system configuration as shown in Figure 8 18 Figure 8 18 Communication system of GLOFA PLC with temperature controller GLOFA PLC Coal lagai Temperature controller RS 232C interface 8 6 1 Exercising program Cnet I F module operates as a master station in user defined mode and temperature controller operated as a slave responds to Read Write data requests of GLOFA Cnet I F module via RS 232C communication port in Figure 8 18 For this service set mode and basic items of Cnet I F module and then prepare frame and GMWIN program As communication protocol of temperature controller is in HEX communication here HEX value is to be defined in the frame of Cnet I F module which is supported only in Cnet Ver 2 0 or later Remark Notel When setting of constant in Frame Editor HEX value can t be input thus former modules than Cnet Ver 2 0 are unavailable for the service Frame Editor also shall be of Ver 2 0 or later for the service Chapter 8 Exercising program 1 Setting items As in communication via RS 232C channel of Cnet I F module Ver 2 0 set operation mode and basic parameters for RS 232C ch
74. C amp Other company s RS 422 communication Q Null modem communication with PC via RS 232C channel is available LI PC Is operated as a master station and Cnet I F module RS 232C channel is operated as a dedicated Slave Q Cnet I F module RS 422 channel is operated in user defined mode Q Display data is transmitted to display modules of mosaic panel via Cnet RS 422 channel Q Display transmission data can be read in PC Figure 6 6 Operation system of 7 segment for RS 422 GLOFA PLC Cnet 1 RS 422 Interface RS 232C Interface RS 422 Interface Module setting Type RS 232C RS 422 Channel mode Station No Dedicated mode TER PLC Cnet 1 User mode l 1 Other company s hanniel dedicated mode 6 6 Chapter 6 System configuration 6 1 7 Optical modem communication for mobile communication Q Optical modem communication system for Cnet communication on body in lineal motion Q Dedicated mode communication or user defined communication with monitoring device LI RS 232C RS 422 communication with optical modem L Dedicated master slave communication between Cnet I F modules Q User defined communication between Cnet I F modules in former version than Cnet Ver 2 0 Q Optical modem connected with Cnet I F module on mobile body can communicate with the other optical modem only when positioned in communication available Q Main application Parking tower Figure 6 7 Optical modem communication system
75. CII value 3031 to HIO ASCII value 3130 v Directvariable Input address of variable to be read actually in ASCII value within 16 characters Others than figure upper lower cases and are not allowed for variable name v Data If the value to be written in MW100 area is H A the data format must be HOOOA If the value to be written in MD100 area is H A the data format must be H0000000A In data area ASCII value converted from HEX data is entered Directvariables available according to PLC type are as follows Type BOOL WORD Double WORD Long WORD GM1 2 MX QX IX MB QB IB MW QW IW MD QD ID ML QL ZIL GM3 YMX QX IX MB QB IB MW QW IW MD QD ID GM6 ZoMX QX ZoMB QB Zo MW Q W MD QD GM7 MX QX IX MB QB IB MW QW IW MD QD ID GM4 MX QX IX MB QB IB MW QW IW MD QD ID Loe X QX IX B QB IB W QW IW D QD ID Loe 7 59 Chapter 7 Communication function Remark Note 1 Refer to technical spec of GLOFA PLC for details to specify the area of each device in GLOFA GM Ex If the data type to write presently is DOUBLE WORD and the data to write is H12345678 its ASCII code converted value is 3132333435363738 which shall be input in data area Namely the highest value shall be transmitted first and the lowest last Remark Notes1 Device data type of each block shall be surely identical Notes2 If data type is BOOL data to w
76. CV_MSG function block in user program If CONVERT is selected in Frame Editor ASCII data is saved as converted to figures and as of characters as they are if NONE Is selected Chapter 5 Frame Editor Figure 5 9 Processing of received data Ext communication device i GLOFA CPU module Header f h Compare headers transmission Compared with segment X gt Data transmission ACY ASG If CONST If ARRAY compare the transmit the CH contents in data Same number of p items with the byte setin the dat received contents item Size to RD1 transmissio At if identical or not of RCV MSG Tail transmission Compare tails BCC J compare BCCs transmission i Figure 5 10 shows the input result of CONST and ARRAY to frame segment in received frame for exercising Figure 5 10 Input result for received frame E If segment input is completed input ETX into tail and apply basic setting to BCC as below to complete received frame input ETA BCC 5 20 Chapter 5 Frame Editor F The following screen is for Frame Editor when received frame is registered The 2th Main Frame RECEIVE ACK ETA ECC G As the immediate response frame is set to REPLY in received frame setting the transmitted frame as of REPLY shall be composed as below 3 Setting of immediate response frame REPLY If RECEIVE frame is received automatic transmission of response frame is available
77. D E H4544 CPU H6D N H534E l m M S Switches CPU from PAUSE mode to program mode stop H4D gt D H5344 PI H6D N H434E m M C Creates PI create H4D KA H4344 P H6D H 444E m M Deletes PI delete H4D H4444 CPU Ka Reads the status of CPU status reading Ka refer to Flag in PLC technical spec for the details Executes initialization command to download program Download H70 S eee Download command is available only if this command is initialization H50 successfully carried out H70 Downloads program File to be downloaded must be the Download p P DX H4458 H50 one created by compile of GMWIN Executes initialization command to upload program Upload H70 H554E ae Sh see Upload command is available only if this command is initialization H50 H5544 pa carried out Ka Upload m Ka isso Uploads program Program H70 k H454E Deletes program If program is deleted it can be started delete H50 H4544 up until downloaded again Remark Note 1 When N is used in command type user defined name is used Note 2 When D is used in command type It is treated as Default If therefore D is used do not insert name Note 3 BCC isn t applied if upper case is used in main command while is applied if lower case is used Note 4 In Gm7 series only the commands such as individual reading of direct variables continuous reading of direct variables individual writing of direct variables continuous writing of
78. ELIET hA TT F LE Th Th kd TOT TOTH Variables SH EE EEEE EAEE uber WA i i A i t 0 L Set Enable Communication in On line status to execute master function in dedicated communication between LG GM7 basic units Chapter 8 Exercising program 8 7 2 User s definition Example of protocol defined communication between GM7 basic units is described in system configuration as below RS 422 485 communication cable GM7 basic unit G7E DR10A G7L CUEC GM7 basic unit G7L CUEC Master station No 0 Slave station No 1 Data in M area of master station is sent to slave station successively saved in M area as received by slave Station output to direct variable and then transmitted to the master station again as processed Master saves the received data to M area again outputs to direct variable processes and then sends the data to Slave station again repeatedly Chapter 8 Exercising program 1 Communication parameter setting and program of slave station A Perform operations in slave station No 1 B Create new project file and new program for slave station TE E Wg meina Jew Source eWded slave prj F PROJECT PLC Type GH He COMNFIGURATIONCPLC gt Configuration Mame UNNAMED E ACCESS VARIABLES 4 variables declared RESOURCECCPU gt H Name RESA B RESOURCE GLOBALS O variables declared C Select communication parameter in GMWIN parameters and double click on it to open
79. ENQ to EOT is converted into ASCII and added to BCC v in computer request format registration No can be set to 00 31 H00 H1F 2 Response format for PLC of ACK response A In case registration format of registration No is the individual reading of direct variables Tree Pa A Registration Number of Number Frame No blocks of data check ae f eee no mos Homa rues H393138334141 ASCII value H3130 H59 79 H313F H3031 H3034 H03 4242 B In case registration format of registration No is the continuous reading of directvariables a Registration Number of Frame Header Command No data check rae E ata wb 49183488 ASCII value a H3130 H313F H3034 H3931383341414242 ae 7 72 Chapter 7 Communication function In case registration format of registration No is the reading of named variables al tamen a Station RN Registration Number of Number of Tail Frame No No blocks data check a vy esta H3931383341 ASCII value H06 H3130 H59 79 H313F H3031 H3034 414242 Data format such as the number of blocks and number of data is the same as in variable reading v Station number commands and register No are the same as in computer request format Y BCC When command is one of lower case y only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 3 response Format for PLC NAK response ae as Error code He
80. Ex 1 NUL ENQ e oO Ex 2 NUL ENQ x wasn tused Up to 3 are allowed continuously Ex 1 ENQ STX JINUL O Ex 2 A J NUL JIENQ ISTX lt x 4 were used continuously gt Transmission R ecelving Notdefined Default value where frame type is not declared Transmission Transmission frame is declared Receiving Receiving frame is declared If fame 0 window Is activated TX RX item is set to Not defined with all segments displayed as inactivated gt Segments 1 8 Let segments input respectively to sort out fixed transmission data area CONST and variable data area ARRAY 7 28 Chapter 7 Communication function Setting items for segment type are NONE no setting CONST fixed data area and ARRAY variable data area CONST is used to declare amp input commands and fixed data to be used in communication frame and ARRAY is used to input amp save data required for mutual communication ARRAY type shall be set always in byte unit only Ex 1 MBO0 QB0 0 0 O Ex 2 MX0 MWO0 MDO QX0 0 0 QW0 0 0 e x Field to input amp declare commands and fixed data to be used in communication frame ASCII input is within 10 characters and HEX input is within 20 characters per segment For the exceeding number set the same type of segments and then input continuously Ex 1 l0RSB06 MW10006 10F S606 ajaa CONST Soh 000G a Size Oo If segment is defined
81. GM3 4 6 7 GM3 4 6 7 Channel select GM 3 4 6 the dedicated mode or other company s dedicated mode 3 2 Chapter 3 Product specification Item Specification Transmission RS 232C Max 15m extendible by using modem distance RS 422 Max 500m EEL Loop Back diagnosis Indication of operation status with 16 LEDs during pa uncon operation with 8 LEDs for GM6 SURIRIS Consumption G6L CUEC Weight Remark Note1 With Frame Editor RS 422 channel of GM3 4 6 can be selected from RS 422 or RS 485 In case of GM7 auto setting is performed by the wiring of communication module on basic unit Note2 In case of connecting channel RS 232C to modem the modem connection is selected in setting menu of RS 232C communication type of Frame Editor G6L CUEC is unavailable Note3 Regardless of Version only Modbus interface function is supported for GM7 Note4 Transmission spec can be set according to each of RS 232C and RS 422 in case of the operating mode of the stand alone channel Note5 Channel selection is set between operating mode by channel and stand alone interlocking channel by the operating mode switch Change of channel mode Is impossible during operation Note6 76 800bps is provided in RS 422 or RS 485 and can be used in Cnetl F module Ver 1 3 or later 3 3 Chapter 3 Product specification 3 3 Cable specifications When using communication channel RS 422 or RS 485 twisted pair cable for RS 42
82. GM_RD GM_WR Function Blocks shall be used with library insertion selected from project menu prior to programming to add the communication library to project Since TM master station is GM2 insert COMMUNI 1FB Each dedicated master program is to be prepared for 8 TM master Cnet I F modules Figure 8 2 shows a program for Cnet I F module of master station slot 0 The program in Figure 8 2 is composed of two parts of 2 Function Block programs and interlock program to allow communication in order through the interlock engaged in execution of Function Block Chapter 8 Exercising program Figure 8 2 Dedicated master program WR_START READ NOR ahi i RE ik se IN vs WR START IN 1 PO START _ ie I Ri TE NOR all 7 p e fi wr RD_START 1 Wy WR_START Interlock program Connect the contact point adjusting execution condition of READ WRITE Function Blocks to Function Block s REQ input to allow two Function Blocks executed in order RD START As an auto variable exe cuted in the first scan by READ Function Block as initially set to 1 WR_START Auto variable initial value 0 OR connect READ NDR READ ERR to execute READ F B first and then WRITE F B with WR_START ON OR connect WRITE NDR WRITE ERR to execute WRITE F B first and then READ F B with RD_START ON REAL GHA FEI REQ T SLM a SLOT ERR cH start ND us CH STATE STN U3 I SIN XNBI0 VAR Ea IO D
83. I F modules the operation mode of Cnet module placed distantly can be also changed No 9 online mode is added to mode switch for this function however mode change Is available using Frame Editor only in online mode with features as below Q Online mode is changeable by adding No 9 online mode to mode switch Q Setting of each operation mode Is available for channels RS 232C RS422 respectively Q Mode changeable for local remote stations Q Mode change for remote station is available only via RS 232C channel Q Set operation mode is saved in flash memory as kept even if powered off Q Reading mode available via Frame Editor Q Other company s dedicated mode can be set only in online mode 5 4 1 Changing of local operating mode The operation mode of Cnet I F module mounted on PLC which is local connected to Frame Editor is changeable by virtue of this function If mode switch is set to No 9 online mode its setting is allowed via the changing menu of online mode of Frame Editor As for changing local mode all operation modes supported in Cnet can be set per channel also to stand alone or interlocking channel Figure 5 13 shows structure of Cnet I F module in local connection Operation mode switch of Cnet I F module mounted on No 0 slot is set to No 9 and Frame Editor is connected with PLC CPU Figure 5 13 Changing of local operation mode No 9 mode switc RS 232C Cable 9 35 Chapter 5 Frame Editor The following
84. IABLES variables declared RESOURCECCPUD B RESOURCE GLOBALS H variables declared B TASK DEFINITIONS 1 tasks defined Oi LD 1 PROGRAM INSTA cf gmvindg Je sourcellded_master a COMMENTS for DIRECT VARIABLES Naim 4 variables declared _ C Select communication parameter in GMWIN parameters and double click on it to open communication parameter menu MGa Communicaton Parameter ae i le ie oe ee re c Cor m m u n i a on M teth D d m 7 i L a a Station Mo ho O Baud Rate Panty Bit oe a Cr a m m u uni i c ati Q n nc ha a ri n e el ss i se a bes a i a ola R8232 Null Modem or RS4221485 ES Oe ea aa a i 92320 Modern Dedicated Line Init Command oy oe a a cas o R9232 Dial Up M Modem o Timeoutin MasterMode Dedicated ieee Slave o tenn a E E MA siento E ATAT eps cree cerca cared meee User Defines se sis Chapter 8 Exercising program Set parameters as below and click on entry list button Communication method Protocol and mode Station Baud l Parity l Communication l Read status Data bit l Stop bit Dedicated No rate bit channel of slave PLC RS232C null 1 57600 None 1 modem or Master Not selected RS422 485 Master station area station No 1 Slave station area station Chapter 8 Exercising program Set parameters as below and click on OK button
85. II value 3130 v Variable name Where the name of variable to be written actually is positioned in ASCII value within 16 characters Others than figure upper lower cases and are not allowed for variable name Upper lower cases are separately used but all access variable names of PLC are composed of upper cases Therefore use upper cases only Remark Note1 Device data type of each block must be same v Ifthis array data is to be specified only 1 block is allowed Number of blocks can be omitted this time v The number of elements means the number of the elements in array Namely if global array variable XX is specified up to array 0 5 the number of elements becomes H06 2 Response format for PLC of ACK response ane Ex at so sm wem o v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format ASCII value v BCC When command is one of lower case w only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 7 67 Chapter 7 Communication function 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response W Station No ame Ex oan a ASCII valve ao smn oen e o v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case w only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte eac
86. L H7F or BCC HFE only as of control character Ex 1 NUL EOT e O Ex 2 NUL EOT e x wasntused gt lt Up to 3 are allowable continuously Ex 1 EOTJ ETX NUL O Ex 2 A INULJ EOTI ETX lt xX 4 were used continuously gt lt gt lt BCC can be used in Tail to detect errors BCC can be available only when BCC is Surely set For detailed contents of BCC setting press BCC setting button on the right for the selection EQT BCC gt BCC setting Set BCC if required BCC Setting 7 31 Chapter 7 Communication function Setting contents For ASCII attach BCC value of 2 byte in ASCII type to frame For HEX attach BCC value of 1 byte in HEX type to frame The result data summed up from 274 data to the data in BCC except 1st data is inserted into BCC Basic setting area ae BCC method can be performed by sum as in basic setting however section of BCC area can be set by user ane BCC method is same as SUM 1 but this is used when the user masks random value to final BCC value ne BCC method is same as XOR 1 but this is used when the user masks random value to final BCC value MUL 1 BCC method is MULTIPLY namely multiplication ae value H stands for Header S for segment and T for Tail Ex 1 For setting of BCC creation range from STX to ETX with Header set to ENQ STX and aes Tail to EOT ETX let the below set H 1 T 1 Setting i
87. LEN and PI_N NAME are unnecessary S PI N_NAME shall be the name to specify or defaultname of P_ Program BCC When command is one of lower case m only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent Table 7 22 Command type RN D Starts PLC start up RN P name RD Default PN D Temporarily stops what Is in operation PN PI name PD Default SN D Switches temporarily stopped PLC to program mode stops i SN Pl name SD Default EN D Restarts temporarily stopped PLC EN P name ED Default 2 Response format for PLC of ACK response ame Ex Asal mo woo e mos o v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case m only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 7 76 Chapter 7 Communication function 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response Station Error code Header Command Command type Tail Frame check amex ma mo mm w nn mms Haro Haeo H52 was w ASCII value v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case m only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from
88. MWIN project for Function Block Service Library Selection a COMMUNI 6tb 33 mkstdlib Gu REMOTES 6tb 2 SPECIAL Gib STDLIB 6th a Stdlib 6fu eR Library File6 o ooo 7 98 Chapter 7 Communication function Table 7 23 describes I O specification of dedicated Function Block Table 7 23 1 0 specification of dedicated Function Block wo ics EI 0 REQ CH input STRING NDR ERR Class data LEN USINT USINT data WR ARRAY USINT data RD ARRAY co o Function Block starts service at rising edge 0 to 1 If Function Block is in service alteration of 0 gt 1 may be ignorable Selects slot number of self station s Cnet I F module to be transmitted to this Function Block Specifies communication channel in Cnet I F module to perform this service 0 RS 232C 1 RS 422 The other station No to communicate via this Function Block is input in decimal 0 31 Displays the other station s memory area to read or write via Function Block with the string characters input as surrounded by quotation mark Max 16 characters can be input for direct variables while BYTE area only is available for the display Ex MB100 QB20 1B50 Unit length of data to read or write is input Max 110 Bytes Specifies start address of local PLC in direct variable byte type where data to write to the other station is saved used for GM_WR FB Ex MB40 MB1000 Specifies start address o
89. N MIN Time Type MRS SCAN CUR Q Contents Time elapsed from prior transmission of the first set parameters until the next transmission 7 111 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 4 Other company s dedicated mode 7 4 1 Introduction Other company s dedicated mode enables user to communicate with other company s devices by having the most useful protocol as selected among communication protocols used in industrial devices built in GLOFA PLC Cnet I F module without preparing additional communication program which is added in Ver 2 0 Asynchronous Link Full Duplex Protocol for serial communication made by AB ALLEN BRADLEY and MODBUS ASCII RTU Protocol made by MODICON PLC among other company s protocols are supported in Cnet Ver 2 0 Other company s dedicated communication driver Supports only server function without master operation available Figure 7 20 shows an example of system configuration for communication in other company s dedicated mode Cnet I F module operates as a Server and executes response function to data request from higher PC or DCS when in AB or MODBUS s dedicated mode communication as shown in the figure Figure 7 20 Example of communication system in other company s dedicated mode Cnet Other company s dedicated mode AB asynchronous link MODBUS ASCILRTU 2 L 7 p ee zapr HEH nip Cen p Pits sal f ziet saf oe Lii a n Modem Dedicated modem Other company s dedicated mode
90. NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see Appendix B Error Code Table 4 Example of use In case of default name wuth excution of P start Computer request format a eo pscivane Hs on o a N For PLC ACK response after execution of command inei Ex Asal SS 03 su so For PLC NAK response after execution of command Pa oia 6 ISCI ali mepe 03 su emon os 1 77 Chapter 7 Communication function Cl Pl Creation MCN MCD This is a function to create PI which can operate PLC This command can be executed in the state that P does not exist inPLC and Domain PLC Program has been downloaded 1 Request format PC gt PLC Header PIN_LEN PIN_ NAME DM_LEN DM_NAME No type a Gis z z H4D H4C 474953 H505247 H434E H3038 H3036 6D 5F504C 43 524D ASCII value H3130 P N_LEN is where the number of PI name s characters is displayed PI N NAME is where PI name is located When PI name is executed as specified the max number of characters is 16 s WY SS If no name is required use D instead of N in command type IfD has been used PIN LEN and Pl_N NAME are unnecessary S PI N_NAME shall be the name to specify or defaultname of P_ Program BCC When command is one of lower case m only one lower byte of the value resulted by addi
91. No Command Sd ee Variable name Pe Frame EJ EN ET ta EN Frame Ex ENQ R MDO Bce ki ASCII H3041 H52 72 H5342 H3034 H254D4430 H3032 value 7 49 Chapter 7 Communication function ent PLC ACK response after execution of command pa tion y commana Number of Number of Frame pE heater Comm Tail type blocks data check Frame R r 12345678 9ABCDEF0 Ex ASCII H31323334353637 38 H06 H3041 H52 72 H5342 H3031 H3038 value 3941424344454630 For PLC NAK aeons after execution of command mman Header Alle a Error code Tail TEN ty ma ES Fomio N HOA re ae ae ETX Bce AK ASCII H15 H3041 H52 72 H5342 Error code 4 value 7 50 Chapter 7 Communication function C1 Reading of named variables R This is a function to read data by using the name registered by registering variable name in access variable of PLC program Refer to technical spec of GLOFA GMWIN for the registration of variables 1 Request format PC gt PLC A For command type of non array Numb Station Comman Command rae Variable Header Variable name No d typelNote Frame Ex Repeated ENQ H10 R r H02 H01 H08 OUTPUT 1 block ASCII H4F5554505554 H05 H3130 H52 72 H3032 H3031 H3038 value 5F31 B For array type for 1 block only comman Number Staton Comman d Variable Number of weet No d typelNote o length elements sae blocks J Frame ENQ H10 R r H17 Ex ASCII H05 H3130 H52 72 H3137
92. O aN IN Ca RA aL E E EE OO Pr S 8 2 8 2 Communication system between Cnet I F modules using optical modem lt ss seerr reece eee e ee eeeees 8 8 8 2 1 Exercising program Tere Ce ee ee ee eT Ce ee ee eee ee ee eT eer ee re ee ee ee 8 9 8 3 GMWIN connection using dial up modemM seeseseeeseseesesesossososesososesososooooossososososoeeos 8 2 8 3 1 Exercising program TOUT CRT Ce ee ee ee ee ee eT eee ee ee 8 21 8 4 Communication with GOLDSEC MJ UC 4eeeeeeeeeececeeeeeecocececeocoeecececceocoecceoeceeoeoeeeeoe 8 25 8 4 1 Exercising program TErrrrrecrre Tee Teer Cr Te Te ee ee re ee ee ee 8 25 8 5 Communication with MASTER K 1000H sessssesesssssssssososeseooosososesooosoosseseooossseeeoos 8 30 8 5 1 Exercising program Terre Te Te ee ee er ee eee 8 30 8 6 Communication with HEX communication equipment SECC ere Te ee eee ee ee eee 8 36 8 6 1 Exercising program reer Tr Ce eee ee ee Oe eee ee ee ee ee 8 36 8 7 Example of using Civ ds Oa Uh od QR 8 45 8 7 1 Dedicated COMMUNICATION master cerrrrc reste eset este eee e eee e teeter ee eeeneeeeeeneeeseeeeesseenees 8 45 8 7 2 User s definition eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeecesesesoeooooooooooooooooososososososososososososososoeoeoeoeososoeoes 8 53 Chapter 9 Diagnosis function ceccocooeoccccococococcecococococcecococoooococcooooooococcocococooccccocoooooccocooooo 9 1 9 6 0 1 Loop Back self diagnosis TTT Te ee ee ee 9 1 91 1 Principle of operation TTCERE TE Te eT ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee 9 1 0 1 2 Procedure ofLoop Backse
93. OD0RSS0104 MBOCet JeqDOASSO1O4 MBOeteqo0RS S0104 MBO0eteqO0RSS0104 M MBOeteqgDOASSO0104 MB Cet jJeqOD0RSSO0104 MBO0eteqooRs 1S0104 MBO0eteqOD0ASSO0104 j MBO0eteqOD0RSS0104 MBO0et JeqQDORSSO104 MBO0eteqo0RS 1S0O104 MBOeteqO0RSS0104 MBOeteqQDOARSSO1I04 MBOet JeqDORSSOTO4 MBO0eteqo0RS S0104 MBO0eteqO0RSS0104 JAMBI et E To analyze transmitted data closely press Stop button as in the receiving monitor and then switch monitor mode to View By changing of View option data can be viewed in HEX or ASCII Remark Notel Transmission monitor is available only for RS 232C channel For receiving monitor of RS 422 channel RS 232C to RS 422 converter shall be used 5 30 Chapter 5 Frame Editor 5 3 Managing function of flash memory Cnet O S can be upgraded and other company s driver also can be downloaded through flash memory of Cnet I F used as an area for Cnet O S and other company s dedicated driver Via flash memory used as an O S rom area Version Up is available by user in person however for Cnet Ver 2 0 or later only along with additional function to manage flash memory for Frame Editor 5 3 1 Write flash memory Set Cnet mode switch to flash writing mode supply power and open the required driver file via Frame Editor to download Write flash memory to Cnet I F module as below 1 Setting of Cnet operation mode If PLC is powered on after Cnet mode switch is set to flash writing mode No 0 LED of C
94. Other Size Area to read Saving area Station No MWO QW0 0 0 Refer to the figure above Refer to the figure above F Entry list 0 can be confirmed as registered in entry list as in the figure below G Double click on entry list 1 with mouse again to enter entry list 1 as below Private 1 lem Edit Slave station area station No 31 Master station area station No 1 Chapter 8 Exercising program Set parameters as below and click on OK button Other station l r Size Area to read Saving area 0 3 1 RX QW0 0 0 QW0 1 0 Refer to the figure above Refer to the figure above H Check if entry list 0 and entry list 1 are registered as in the figure below and then press Close button to go to communication parameter window fO Station Number 31 Send I Click on OK button in communication parameter window to complete parameter setting input J Prepare program as in the figure below and let it downloaded to GM7 basic unit of master station Refer to user s manual of GMWIN for the details of programming and downloading Chapter 8 Exercising program et Ee Ge bese ref IRE E f Patel eai EES spat ee eran el em ee ee o e e ee a c Womwin3 3eWsourc eWded master B TASK DEFINITIONS gt 1 tasks defined 2i OE LD 1 PROGRAM INSTh citgmwind seWsourcefded_ E COMMENTS for DIRECT VARIABLES gt H variables declared ij PARAMETERS E BASIC PARAMETERS Fw kAkAI
95. Packet Packet a compound term of package and bucket used for packet exchange type to send information as divided in a unit of packet separates transfer data into the defined length and adds a header that presents the opposite addresses station No etc into it 8 Port Port is meant to be the part of the data process devices which sends or receives the data from a remote control terminal in data communications but in Cnet serial communication is meant to be the RS 232C or RS 422 port 9 RS 232C RS 232C is the interface to link a modem with a terminal and to link a modem with a computer and is also the serial communications specification established by EIA according to the recommendations of the CCITT This is also used to link the null modem directly as well as the modem linkage The disadvantage is that the transfer length is short and only 1 1 communication is available and the specifications which recover this disadvantage are RS 422 and RS 485 10 RS 422 RS 485 As one of the serial transmission specifications its transfer length is long and multi 1 N connections are available compared to RS 232C The difference of these two specifications is that RS 422 uses 4 signals of TX TX RX and RX while RS 485 has 2 signals of amp where data is sent and received through the same signal line Accordingly RS 422 executes the full duplex type of communication and RS 485 executes the half duplex type of communicati
96. Program upload command PUX This uploads the program data after initialization of program upload This service must be performed within 1 sec after program upload initialization service 1 Request format PC gt PLC Station Command Frame No Header Command Tail Frame check renger S88 commana type HEX 2 Bytes Tal Frame check o P Frene Ex H 00 ASCI value yao soo sss waooo noe v Frame No indicates the number of frame in current proceeding v Frame No indicates the current frame number 4 Bytes to be uploaded in the entire upload sequence This number must be incremental in sequence until the upload finishes completely Frame No increases in sequence from 0001 BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 2 Response format for PLC of ACK response A Station Comma Comma Frame No Number of data No nd nd type HEX 2 Bytes HEX 1 Byte Frame Ex 0 4000 ASCII value H3031 H5558 H30303031 H3141 v Number of data indicates the number of data included in this frame v Number of data can be included up to 120 Bytes in one frame v Forthe lastframe frame No is to be HFFFF 46 46 46 46 If the lastframe is responded all upload processes are finished BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by add
97. TA area temporally Temporal data of RD DATA if STATUS value is 0 saves 24 bytes of RX data in Starting MB300 address in order through this program Chapter 8 Exercising program Figure 8 21 Read data program of temperature controller Ts IP eae ee eee RCYO_232 RESPONSE RESPONSE 2 NOR ERF a Suse Seal Loe nn DU SS i RESPONSE NOR Fa orp lay A i MOVE STATUSO IN ur EN i CON ACK 0 IM ROLOATA INI OUT DATA STATUS i QU DATA RD DATA as of RX data temporary saving If 0 Is indicated as compared with RX data STATUS tt variable area of RX moves RD DATA fuction block and auto to MB300 area variable set to 24 ARRAYS P STATUS setto RD1 of Response Function Block is auto variable to Editor to save RX data received in 00 of RX frame and checks normal TEMPER SHO HSE ee epee RESPONSE REY MSG REQ NOR 0 SLOT ERRE NO SLOT ERR 0 CH sTaTl Us CH a st CONRD FNAM FNAM LENI DUMMY SD1 RDI LENZ 0 LENI RUZ I DATA is actual saving variable of RX data and variable allocation is set to 24 ARRAY variables in MB300 address save data set to ARRAY segment in Frame response as compared with this area Figure 8 22 shows a program to write data with temperature controller TX button as of variable allocated to IX0 1 0 sends TX data if ON entered TX data allocates D
98. TOP SYS RUN RS 232C RUN BPS TX BPS RX BPS ACK DATA NAK PARITY miala VAAN pO B D RS 485 STOP SYS ERR RS 422 2 Module s LED status during normal communication G4L CUEA RUN BPS TX BPS RX BPS ACK DATA NAK PARITY Rava A d n DID MODEM STOP SYS RUN RS 232C Remark RUN BPS TX BPS RX BPS ACK DATA NAK PARITY miala AAN AO B D RS 485 STOP SYS ERR RS 422 RUN BPS always ON MODEM STOP always ON RUN BPS always ON TX BPS if in transmission ON RX BPS if in receiving ON ACK DATA refer to Note1 MODEM STOP always ON SYS RUN dimly ON Notel ACK and NAK are turned ON if normal response is transmitted when communicating in dedicated mode Refer to Chapter 7 for details of dedicated mode in this user s manual 3 Troubleshooting for module If module s LED status is abnormal differently as above refer to checklist in Table4 4 to Shoot the trouble 4 24 Chapter 4 Performance specification Table4 6 Checklist for module s LED LED type If abnormal Action to take RUN OFF 1 Run RS 232C channel operation using Frame Editor 1 Check cable connection between module and dedicated modem Flash if in No flash 2 Check setting of mode program and station number based on transmission l module operation mode 1 Check connection of dedicated line Flash if in Check status of dedicate
99. TX RX data map Master station memory Slave station memory TX RX TX RX Length Length Length Length Area area area area Station 0 MBO 20bytes MB400 50bytes MB100 50bytes MB200 20bytes Station 1 MB20 20bytes MB450 50bytes MB100 50bytes MB200 20bytes Station 2 MB40 20bytes MB500 50bytes MB100 50bytes MB200 20bytes Station 3 Station 4 Staton 5 Staton Staton 7 8 1 1 Exercising program As Ex 8 1 1 is 1 1 communication system via dedicated modem for TM master slave communication setting for dedicated modem communication in Cnet I F module and 1 1 communication programming between Cnet I F modules shall be prepared Next is the procedure to follow the above in order Basic parameters related communication should be identical between master slave stations and set as agreed with modem specification as below Q Communication Speed 9600 BPS Q Data bit 8 bits Q Start Stop bit 1 bit Q Parity None 1 Dedicated modem connection Connect 9 pin cable with dedicated modem and Cnet I F module via RS 232C channel Refer to 4 4 How to connect to dedicated modem for connection type prior to connection between Cnet I F module and dedicated modem 2 Dedicated modem setting Refer to user s manual for setting of operation type of dedicated modem as agreed with communication type with Cnet I F module Related items to communication with Cnet I F module are to be set as follows Dedicated modem s
100. Table7 14 List of data types of array named variables Command type Command type Data type Data type ASCII value ASCII value Array BIT 43135 Aray INT H3146 Array BYTE H3136 Array UDINT H3230 Array WORD H3137 _ Array ULINT 13231 Array DWORD a318 araynean n2 Waa H3232 22 Array LWORD H3139 Aray LREAL 13233 Array SINT H3141 Array TIME H3234 Array INT H3142 Array DATE H3235 Array DINT 13143 Array ToD 13236 Array LINT H3144 Array DT 43237 Array USINT ws Remark Note 1 To read write named variables the name as of the identical data type must be registered to access variables of PLC program Refer to user s manual of GMWIN for the registration Note 2 In Gm7 series reading writing commands of long word direct variables named variables and array variables are unavailable 7 42 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 2 5 Execution of commands Ex Individual reading of direct variables RSS This is a function to read PLC device memory directly specified in accord with memory data type Separate device memories can be read up to 4 ata time 1 Request format PC gt PLC Station Comm Command Number of Variable Variable Header No and type blocks length name H254D57 H3230 H52 72 H5353 H3031 H3036 1 1 block Setting can be repeated up to 4 blocks v Number of blocks This specifies the number of the blocks composed of Variable length Variable name in this
101. U error occurred See Trouble shooting of CPU N Is connection status of N Check correct connection status of Cnet I F Cnetl F module normal module and supply power again Y Contact Service station 11 3 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Set Cnet I F module to dedicated mode Set Cnet I F module to dedicated mode and supply power and supply power Download basic parameters amp frame Download other company s dedicated through frame editor to 2 channels driver file through frame editor Restore mode switch to the original value Restore mode switch to the original value and then supply power again and then supply power again Dose the same error occur Dose the same error occur Y Contact service station Contact service station 11 4 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 11 2 2 Error code ERR 3 Communication command error Communication command error See commands and user s manual to correct it Any error in communication command or link Is STATUS value in operation 64 66 or 73 Check if desired communication module is Is STATUS value in operation 16 mounted on slot entered in function block program Is STATUS value in operation 67 Defined frame data has not been downloaded to communication module Let Is STATUS value in operation 68 frame downloaded See communication command error codes Is the error code 16 32 inside to correct It
102. Yk 1 ee F f oa he i p ne mens i PALETI pi Serres x oat 1 A a re F z ae oe a ASS C Transmission of Immediate response frame GMWIN program needs not to be prepared additionally for transmission of immediate response frame Since IMM_RESPONSE is registered as immediate response frame of receiving frame RD_DATA in Frame Editor and IMM_RESPONSE is registered to transmission frame Cnet I F module transmits previously registered IMM_RESPONSE frame if RD_DATA frame is received 7 24 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 1 5 User defined communication for Gm7 series GM7 Cnet I F module sets mode and defines protocol in GMWIN Ver 3 3 or later differently from other Cnet I F modules For user defined protocol communication the contents of the protocol to use shall be exactly informed to communicate data User prepared protocol frame can be downloaded to GM7 basic unit via GMWIN Ver 3 3 or later and the saved data Is kept inside GM7 basic unit indelibly for use even if powered off However when communication parameters are downloaded as changed or when data can be no more backup due to lowered voltage of backup battery than average damage on protocol frame may occur For user defined mode service programming via Function Block to control TX RX in PLC is needed in addition to frame edit 1 Parameter setting A Communication parameters setting Open new project file in GMWIN v Be sure to sele
103. a one Function Block using Reading Writing commands of continuous blocks of dedicated communication protocol Q Service result can be checked via NDR ERR output of Function Block Q For communication with multi stations in RS 422 channel programming is necessary to allow communication in order in GMWIN program So to protect the crash error of data Q All Cnet I F modules operated as master slave are set to dedicated mode Q Module operated as master is allowed only for 1 station Note 1 Remark Note 1 Only one station among Cnet I F modules connected via dedicated mode must be set to master station Namely Function Block for dedicated communication shall be used only in one station If several masters are applied normal communication is unavailable due to data crash in communication line 7 97 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 3 2 Function Block for dedicated communication Figure 7 15 shows Function Block used for dedicated reading writing Function Blocks for dedicated communication are Classified into GM_RD to read data and GM_WR to write data of the other station Figure 7 15 Function Block for dedicated communication 2 F Bs are executed in a cycle of 1 sec successively by Interrock amp Timer Interrock Program Figure above shows an example of Function Block for dedicated communication master function Select COMMUNI fo in library selection dialog box shown as below to insert communication library in G
104. access variable area variables reading H15 Reads data of array named variable Array H72 H3135 r R Variable to be read must be registered in access reading H52 H3237 H27 variable area Individual H77 Writes data to direct variables of Bit Byte Word 7 SS H5353 Direct writing H57 Dword and Lword types variables writing Continuous H77 6c H5353 Writes data to direct variables of Bit Byte Word writing H57 Dword and Lword types 400 Writes variables of each data type using variable Individual H77 H3030 names writing H57 H3134 Variable to be written must be registered in Named H14 access variable area variables writing H15 Writes data to array named variable Array H77 H3135 E w W Variable to be written must be registered in writing H57 H3237 H27 access variable area H00 Register variable to be monitored If registered H78 H 3030 Register x X 459 143331 variable is named one variable to be read must H31 be registered in access variable area Monitor H00 Execution Y ee aie Executes the registered variable to monitor i H59 f H3331 7 39 Chapter 7 Communication function command type Classification Contents ASCII ASCII Sign Sign code code CPU H6D oN H524E l m M Starts up CPU with RUN mode start up H4D D H5244 CPU H6D ra H504E l m M Switches CPU to PAUSE mode pause H4D ES H5044 CPU H6D N H454E l m M E Restart CPU in PAUSE mode restart H4
105. actions to take to check for the cause of errors Table 7 25 Error codes and Actions to take when dedicated F B is executed STATUS Meaning Action to take value dec 1 Check setting of correspondent station No l 2 Check dedicated mode for operation of No response from correspondent station correspondent station 3 Check communication basic parameters Position of Cnet I F module is incorrectly 1 Check if SLOT_NO value is correct specified 1 Check operation mode of local Cnet I F module 2 Check channel No NAK from correspondent station has been 1 Check variable name MB QB IB BYTE No response from Cnet I F module received only available Inout parameter setting is incorrect 2 Check data length 7 102 Chapter 7 Communication function 4 Why is the interlock program used Slave station in dedicated mode responds to only one request at a time Thus even if later different request frame is received before an earlier request frame is processed by the slave station the slave station dose not answer to the later request frame until the earlier request frame is processed In case that several request frames are transmitted at the same time prior to the response of the slave later request frames are ignored by the slave station causing data loss Figure 7 18 describes the principles of this operation Figure 7 18 Example of data loss DATA LOSS DATA LOSS DATA LOSS Master s
106. ader Command Tall Frame check rame E ME Ta m ere ec ms uano sono e ea w ASCII value v Station number commands and register No are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case y only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see Appendix B Error Code Table 4 Example of use In case reading of variable registered in registration No 1 of station No 1 is executed supposing that 1 block is registered by named variable reading in data type of DINT Computer request format el tel RE ER a E ASCII value 7 73 Chapter 7 Communication function For PLC ACK response after execution of command Fa Registration Number of Number of Frame Header Command Tail No blocks data check ed ak a ee ASCII value ro H3031 H59 79 H3031 H3031 H3034 H3233343232333339 For PLC NAK espanse are execution of command No Tata a w3oa1 sogo Haoi O Emorcoaey Hoa E ASCII value Py 1 74 Chapter 7 Communication function C PLC control command M The control of PLC operation with computer communication module is the same as the control with FAM4 0 in GLOFA Fnet and Mnet The control command of PLC operation with computer communication mod
107. ameters via RS 422 channel through On line connection and then run channel operation to finish preparation of Cnet operation Chapter 8 Exercising program 4 GMWIN programming After frame edit and download are completed prepare program in GMWIN to save TX RX data of TX frames Next figure shows GMWIN program for TX RX communication with MJ 71UC24 With 1 sec timer RD REQ frame is transmitted in a cycle of 1 sec and 24 bytes of data received are saved in variable area of RDT if RD_ DATA frame is received As a RX checking flag of RD_ DATA frame it turns on if the frame registered as No 1 frame is received via RS 422 channel of No 0 slot Cnet I F module RX data is saved in variable defined to RD1 e of RCV_MSG Function Block with variable allocation set to MB100 and with 25 ARRAY variables reserved to receive 24 bytes data MB100 Chapter 8 Exercising program 8 5 Communication with MASTER K 1000H Communication between GLOFA PLC and MASTER K 1000H PLC will be described below Figure 8 14 shows the system where this module is connected with CPU communication port of MASTER K 1000H via RS 232C Programming for Cnet I F module as of a master station to write data in MASTERK K1000H output area in accordance with MASTER K 1000H s dedicated communication protocol is described in the figure Its an example for Read 10 word data from MW2100 address of GLOFA PLC and Write 10 word data to ou
108. ance specification A If no response in time No Response a a Men If the message above is displayed RS 232C cable between PC and PLC may not be connected or the connection status may be abnormal Check the connection status of RS 232C cable to verify that RS 232C cable is correctly connected with loader port of PLC CPU B If failed to open communication port The message below is displayed as caused separately by abnormal setting of communication port Communication Eror fa EE a ER CS ent ciao ccm ma eens If the message Can t open port is displayed check communication port setting in option menu of Frame Editor if set as repeated with the mouse or other devices and then try re connection Notel PLC connection is unavailable with Frame Editor if connected with PLC in GMWIN program If the message above Can t open port Is displayed check if GMWIN is connected in GMWIN program Note2 To the contrary connection to GMWIN as connected via Frame Editor isn t allowed 10 After the connection is completed select Online Wnite to write parameters 4 14 Chapter 4 Performance specification Write untitled frm ie x In Write dialog box as above set the position where the module to be written is mounted with slot No and select writing with communication option set to basic parameter Note1 If user defined frame has been prepared let it set to frame in communication option to write f
109. ancel Chapter 8 Exercising program Response frame to Write request GM WR_ACK RX frame ETA BCC Frame name is GM_WR_ ACK Response frame to Write request has no data thus enter only RX frame as of CONST in segment 1 Read request frame GM_RD TX frame EOT BCC 8 14 Chapter 8 Exercising program Frame name is GM_RD And as of TX frame it requests reading of 14 bytes data in HEX Response frame to Read request GM_RD_ACK RX frame ETXECC Chapter 8 Exercising program Frame name is GM_RD_ ACK Since RX frame has a data enter CONST in segment 1 and allocate 20 bytes of data RX area in ARRAY to segment 2 As in ASCII communication select Convert to convert received ASCII data to HEX to allow receiving in figures Total screen of frame entry Next is the basic screen of Frame Editor where 4 frames are registered showing frames 0 3 are entered in frame list Cnet Frame Editor untitled frm Ci x jar 14 GM_WR_ACK 2 GM_RD 3 GM_RD_ACK After frame edit above is finished save the file and download the frame to Cnet I F module to run RS 232C channel for preparation of operation TX sequence of 4 frames is as shown in Figure 8 6 User defined program shall be prepared in GMWIN to allow TX RX in order as in the figure Figure 8 6 TX sequence of TX RX frames Write request TX GM_WR Write rsponse GM_WR_ ACK Read request TX GM_RD
110. and modem can be connected to Cnet I F module Since most external modems are provided with DTE connection cable to connect to PC along with 9 pin female connector on DTE as reversed in connection the built in cable is not allowed to use The connection cable is to be manufactured separately according to the wiring above 4 4 2 3 Initial setting of module Follow the sequence below via Cnet I F module after modem is selected and connection cable is wired to initialize dial up modem and set to connection stand by mode 1 Operation mode setting Set mode switch value of module correctly to desired position Operation mode can be set only in the range shown in Table4 3 Modem connection is unavailable in interlocking mode 4 28 Chapter 4 Performance specification Connect interface cable linked as specified in 4 4 2 2 for pin connection to RS 232C port of this module and DTE connection terminal of the modem A Connect the phone line to line terminal of modem B Letmodem and PLC powered on C Run Frame Editor to set communication type of RS 232C channel to modem and input initializing command Note 00 Dial Up Modem lr Null Modem Dial Up Modem Siin Dedicated Modem Remark Note1 Each maker provides modem with various functions while communication control mode is to be set by user Mode setting of modem operation shall be set by initializing command of modem like this and the operation mode
111. annel Table 8 9 describes setting items of Cnet I F module Table 8 9 Setting items of Cnet I F module RS 232C channel setting item Setting contents Operation mode Mode 2 user defined mode RS 422 channel not used RS 232C station No Basic value Not used Communication speed and basic Communication type Null modem communication spec shall be as specified 38400 BPS DATA 8 bits in spec of temperature controller RS 232C basic parameters a START 1 bit STOP 1 bit communication 2 Communication cable connection and basic setting RS 232C communication channel of temperature controller is connected with Cnet RS 232C channel If Handshake free type of null modem communication is applied to temperature controller perform connection as shown in Figure 8 19 After that set communication type of temperature controller identical to the communication type of Cnet I F module in Table 8 9 to complete basic setting for communication Refer to the user s manual of temperature controller to set temperature controller Figure 8 19 3 line connection between Cnet and temperature controller Handshake free Cnet 9 pin Chapter 8 Exercising program 3 Communication protocol of temperature controller For communication between Cnet I F module and temperature controller communication type of temperature controller is to be informed of The example describes how to prepare program supposing that communication protocol is a
112. apply force enough until the upper is engaged completely in locking device of the base board If the locking device is not tightly engaged in error may occur to interfacing with CPU Set operation mode as desired through the switch in front of communication module Refer to general specification for operation mode Tighten up the connection cable of electric module with cable connecting screw until connected firmly After communication cable is connected supply power and check LED operation status if normal or not If normal download and execute frame and program through frame definition and GMWIN User defined mode 10 2 Chapter 10 Installation and Testing operation 10 1 1 1 Installation of Gm7 series 1 As GM7 is provided basically with DIN Rail width of 35mm railing hook in addition to basic unit and extended module DIN rail inlet is available 2 Connection of Gm7 series with basic unit is as described below A Open extension connector cover of the basic unit B Insert connector of communication module into extension connector of the basic unit Basic unit Extension connector cover Communication module Extension cable 10 3 Chapter 10 Installation and Testing operation 10 1 2 Cautions during system configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 Correctly select which operation mode may be used by user for Cnet I F module service and let operation mode set accordingly Bewar
113. at a time Write C WGMWIN3 S SOURCEWCNE TWGMB Tx Type o gt Slot number of Cnet I F E E E E nen module to write pe Radio button for data selection to write F Select communication option and Write button to display the dialog box of Write OK as below Herein select OK to start ng G If download is completed the following completion message is displayed to indicate download completed Note1 Transfer Basic Parameters 5 24 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Remark Note1 If frame or basic parameters are downloaded the communication of downloaded channel stops In this case switch the channel to Run mode via Change Run Stop It is caused by changed basic setting for communication to stop the operation of the channel H Since downloaded channel is in communication stop status select menu Online Change Run Stop and open the dialog box of Change Run Stop to re start communication Change Hun stop I The dialog box of Change Run Stop is to stop or run the operation of the appropriate channel Since the channel operation stopped due to downloading select Cnet s slot number and appropriate channel and press Run button to switch over to communication run status and re start the operation in communication mode downloaded If Run button is selected the message below is displayed Remark Notel The status of communication run or stop per channel can be
114. ated communication pots Flash writing mode Not used in Ver 1 QlNote6 On line mode Applicable module G6L CUEB CUEC a CUEB i Oo o 4 1 Chapter 4 Performance specification Remark Notel In interlocking mode main channel is set to RS 232C RS 422 channel is operated as data path of channel RS 232C channel RS 422 disabled and transmission spec is operated according to setting value of RS 232C Note2 RS 232C RS 422 channels are operated separately in stand alone mode Note3 Off line mode sets the operation mode with mode switch existing mode Note4 Supported only in Ver 2 0 or later and used for downloading of library file of other company s dedicated communication protocol with flash memory of Cnet I F module Note5 Supported only in Ver 2 0 or later and used for setting the operation mode of module with Frame Editor Note6 When setting in mode not used do not set Cnet I F module because both channels of RS 232C RS 422 are not operated Note7 Separate setting of operation mode for GM7 series isn t required however the operation is decided according to communication parameter of GMWIN 4 2 Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 1 1 Channel operation in interlocking mode In interlocking mode channels RS 232C and RS 422 are operated as interlocked with each other In other words the data received via channel RS 232C is sent via channel RS 422 and the data received via channel RS
115. ated slave communication For dedicated mode communication the station operated by slave responds via ACK or NAK frame And NAK responds including error code in NAK frame to distinguish error types The following table is for error codes for NAK response used in Slave station of dedicated communication Acton tte 0001 PLC system error Interface with PLC impossible Power On Off Check if other character than Error occurred when ASCII data value is l 0011 Data error S digits has been used as variable converted into digits name or data correct and execute again 1132 Wrong device memory specified Inspect device type l Execution data number exceeding 120 1232 Data size error si Correct data length ytes 1332 Data type error Data types mismatch between variables Equalize data types 1432 Data value not digits Inspect data value Equalize variable and data type of 2432 Data type error Data type mismatch with actual variable PLC program ines Remote control Remote Acdess Right not allowed in Set Remote Acdess Right to not allowed PLC parameter allowed and then execute again Create P with PI creation 7252 PLC not operated No PI to operate PLC command 2652 P not created No Domain in PLC Download Domain to PLC l 1 Mode status 1 Operation mode aD RUN gt PI STOP Only 1 Execute again with change error PAUSE gt PI RESET P RESUME changeable operation mode SSTOP gt PI_ START Only 4252 DEBUG lt gt PI RESET Onl
116. ation 2 to its MBO area and reads writes 40 bytes of data from its MB20 to MB200 area of station 3 Next is for this mapping data TX RX l Slave Master Slave Data Master station l Class station area area length Station 1 Station 2 MBO MB100 10 Bytes Station 1 Station 3 MB20 MB200 40 Bytes Figure 7 16 RS 485 communication structure between Cnet I F modules Cnet 1 Cnet 7 Cnet 3 Master v2 0 Slave Slave Dedicated mode Dedicated mode RS 485 Interface 2 Basic setting items Figure 7 16 shows system configuration composed of RS 485 multi drops between Cnets For the system communication between Cnet I F modules RS 422 operation mode of 3 stations shall be set to dedicated mode with the stations numbers set to station No 1 2 3 respectively as not repeated Since all 3 stations are in communication via the same communication line all basic parameters such as communication speed data stop bit etc shall be set identical Next is basic setting items for communication between 3 stations Station No Mode switch Master Slave 3 dedicated stand alone l Station1 Surely Ver 2 0 Master operation mode RS 422 3 dedicated stand alone basic parameters of 3 l Station2 Irrelevant to Ver Slave operation mode stations shall be set 3 dedicated stand alone identical Station 3 Irrelevant to Ver Slave operation mode 7 100 Chapter 7 Communication function 3 PLC programming Figure 7 17 shows comm
117. ation error No error Flash Communication erro occurred 14 RS 485 OFF Not used Not used pa SYSTEM ogee Communication module in ERR abnormal operation If in normal operation the following status will be displayed for RS 232C RS 422 channels when display switch is not pushed Q RUN ACK LED is ON and TX RX LEDs flash in a cycle of 1 sec LI No 8 SYS RUN LED is dimly ON Q Other LEDs than those above are OFF Chapter 9 Diagnosis function If displayed as above module operation is normal including communication Table 9 2 LED status depending on operation contents G6L CUEB G6L CUEC NA No NAK response En n error RU TX RX AC NA ER N K K R SYS RUN Dimly ON CPU amp I F executed N K K R 2 3 4 3 0 0 O 0 Not used CPU amp I F stopped 1 1 No transmission 2 a CE ACK responding No NAK response n No NAK response lear Flash Communication error occurred Communication module in Normal Flash abnormal operation No receiving No ACK response 4 F 0 0 0 O RS 485 SYSTEM 7 fe fe n FF FF FF n n FF FF FF FF Chapter 9 Diagnosis function 2 LED display in case LED display switch is pushed Except for G6L CUEB G6L CUEC If LED display switch is pushed during Loop Back diagnosis the result from comparison between the sent test data and the received data through Loop Back Is displayed on LED Cnet I F module creates sends testdata in a cycle o
118. ation medium between modems differs from each other 7 131 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 5 3 Remote connection between Cnet I F modules Figure 7 25 shows an example of remote connection to PLC located far away when GMWIN and local PLC are connected to CPU via RS 232C cable and RS 232C channel of Cnet I F module mounted on local PLC communicates with Cnet I F module of remote PLC via dedicated modem As shown in the figure GMWIN can control remote PLC program via remote connection through modem communication function between Cnet I F modules Figure 7 25 Remote connection between Cnet I F modules Remote connection Dedicated line Dedicated line Dedicated line Remote connection via communication between Cnet I F modules as in Figure 7 25 is applied according to the following Sequence A SetRS 232C channel operation of Cnet I F module to dedicated modem B Set RS 232C channel of Cnet I F module to GMWIN mode Note Note 1 If both Cnets are of Ver 2 0 or later operation mode of remote Cnet I F module can be changed to GMWIN mode through On line mode change function of Frame Editor Refer to Chapter 5 6 for On line mode change Note 2 If Cnet I F module is of Ver 2 0 or later and communication is in dedicated mode no need to change to GMWIN mode GMWIN connection is also available in dedicated mode 7 132 Chapter 7 Communication function C Switch local connected PLC to stop mode Notel Rema
119. basic parameters doesn t need setting as it is not used in user defined mode The default value is No 0 When preparing frame frame name shall be set for 3 types of frames as below A Write request frame WR REQ B Read data frame RD DATA C Immediate response frame IMM RESPONSE Figure7 6 shows basic screen where 3 frames are registered Figure7 6 Basic screen of Frame Editor Cnet Frame Editor C GMWIN3 3 SOURCEWCNETWSAMPLEWS SHI Awol Hi EE Fy Figure7 6 is the result screen after basic parameters and TX RX frames are all defined Refer to Chapter 5 Frame Editor for details of preparing basic parameters and frames Next is how to prepare 3 types of frames 7 15 Chapter 7 Communication function 1 Registration of Write request frame Write request frame of frame structure as in Table 7 6 is registered according to the sequence below Select the 1st item of frame list in the basic screen of Frame Editor and input WR_REQ to frame name And then select SEND in TX RX and input data to Header as below The Ith Main Frame Input segment Since WR 18 in transmission frame body area of Table 7 6 is unchanged constant area set it to CONST and input WR18 And since data area is variable area changeable per frame set type to ARRAY input SD1 and input 18 the number of transmission data to size As for transmission data which is figure select Convert t
120. ble of RX data Add Edit Yariables o0_ SAVE wo aT Figure 8 9 shows interlock program of Write data Function Block If in normal communication it allows TX RX as in sequence shown in Figure 8 6 and even in abnormal communication it allows communication in the following sequence after waiting for response 1 sec Figure 8 9 Interlock program to Write data After Write request frame is executed delete WR START flag and ere turn MON 1 flag ON which turns on monitoring timer of Write R_START ie response frame pote on MON _1 lr 5 After Write response frame is received tun on RD START to ree send Read request frame and turn off MON 1 flag to stop frame os monitorina timer WRACK ERR MON _ I oR BTTONI yt TON If no response is received for 1 sec after Write RU_START Nee tt request frame is sent turn on RD START to a a send Read request frame so to allow next frame HON Ws PT E transmitted even in abnormal state through this o interlock program Chapter 8 Exercising program Figure 8 10 shows interlock program of Read data Function Block If in normal communication it allows TX RX as in sequence shown in Figure 8 6 and even in abnormal communication it allows communication in the following sequence after waiting for response 1 sec Figure 8 10 Interlock program to Read data After Read request frame is transmitted delete RD START flag ies an
121. case the range is set to H 0 T 0 with BCC type of MUL 1 Calculation Ex In exercising frame perform Multiplication calculation of ASCII codes in calculation range of H 0 T 0 02 X 05 X 30 X 30 X 52 X 53 X 42 X 32 X 30 X 30 X 04 00 BCC value HEX 00 ASCII 3030 5 16 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Function for data mask of BCC calculation results in MUL 1 is added Masks are classified into amp AND OR and XEx OR Ex In case the mask is set to F0 with the setting range of H 0 T 0 by MUL 2 of BCC type Calculation Ex In exercising frame multiply ASCII codes in calculation range of H 0 T 0 02 X 05 X 30 X 30 X 52 X 53 X 42 X 32 X 30 X 30 X 04 00 Use the result from OR calculation between the result 00 and F0 for BCC BCC HEX F0 ASCII 4630 Mask If BCC calculation is set to SUM2 XOR2 MUL2 masking option of calculation result to specified data is available with the 3 following methods Q amp Use the result from AND calculation with data behind the signal for BCC Q Use the result from OR calculation with data behind the signal for BCC Q Use the result from Exclusive OR calculation with data behind the signal for BCC Figure 5 6 shows the result of frame registration from frame name to BCC in sequence as above and the frame name Is registered via SEND Figure 5 6 Completed transmitted frame The 1th Main Frame 5 17 Chapter 5 Frame Editor
122. checked through LED display in Cnet module RUN LED if turned on means communication run and communication stop if off per channel Even when PLC reset or powered back communication Is switched over to Run mode 5 25 Chapter 5 Frame Editor 2 Reading upload Basic parameters and frame data downloaded in Cnet I F module are saved in flash memory as kept inside Cnet I F module even if powered off And these data can be also saved in file by reading via Frame Editor The following describes the sequence of frame reading A Select Online Connect in Frame Editor and connect to PLC B If connected select Online Read to display the Read dialog box as below and then select channel and Read type via slot No communication type and communication option Read C WGMWIN3 SH SOURCEWCNETWGMB E3 l Slot No soro H El oy a S C After required items are selected select menu Read to display the status in which basic parameters and frame are read Receive Basic Parameters Pa l wr Baa ees 5 26 Chapter 5 Frame Editor 5 2 4 Monitor function When data is transmitted or received via this communication module it needs checking if actually transmitted well or what kind of data is received Usually protocol analyzer has been used for checking the data in spite of the troublesome procurement However to shoot the trouble receiving monitor function is provided for Frame Editor to view the data receive
123. ck variable name MB QB IB BYTE only received available oy Inout parameter setting is incorrect Check data length 10 17 21 35 37 A 11 Appendix A 3 Dimensions of appearance e G3L CUEA Unit mm NUUUOUU gt BE eee NUUUOUU ll DISPLAY Co O 0SGZ 118 0 130 5 A 12 Appendix e G4L CUEA UUUUUUL Co _ J311 C0 UUUUUUU G4L CUEA AUN BPS THIBPS AMPS ACK ADATA ACK IDATA HAKIPAR ITY ARS EVEN O00 EAR BYE IO RODER STOP ASR 455 STOP 2 TS ALA SHERR O SEL A 13 Appendix e G6L CUEB G6L CUEC Dimensions of G6L CUEB amp G6L CUEC are identical with each other A 14 OOTT Appendix e G7L CUEB G7L CUEC G7L CUEB and G7L CUEC has the same dimensions 04 5 O S6 O SOT ST G7L CUEC PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER OEL A 15
124. cking channel Stand alone channel Stand alone channel LIPL and cnet FL Station perorm KS 2Z3 RS 422 Interface Q Communication between Cnet I F modules is unavailable Q Cnet I F module can connect with max 32 stations RS 422 communication Q Cnet 1 station is set to interlocking mode and Cnet 2 N station are set to stand alone mode Q All Cnet I F module RS 422 channels shall be set to identical communication speed and operation mode Q Cnet I F module 2 N station communicate with PC via RS 422 channel and with monitoring device and printer via RS 232C channel Q If monitoring device is GP or PMU RS 232C of Cnet N station can be set to dedicated mode Chapter 6 System configuration Figure 6 5 Compound system of interlocking and stand alone channels O ASCII printer Monitoring device RS 232C RS 232C Interface Interface RS 232C Interface GLOFA PLC GLOFA PLC Cnet 2 FRH fa T a Fi ra i onnon f E Fou x i Interlocking Stand alone Channel evans GLOFA PLC Stand alone channel RS 232C Interface Module setting Type ee ee RS 232C RS 422 Channel mode EN No pere mode PLC Cnet 1 Not used Interlocking channel Other company s dedicated mode company s dedicated mode Dedicated mode Dedicated mode Cnet 2 31 Other company s Stand alone channel 2 31 User mode dedicated mode Chapter 6 System configuration 6 1 6 Dedicated communication with P
125. correspondent to Read frame responds to the received command without data Table7 8 Structure of Immediate response frame Trans sequence Header Frame body l Frame type Tail Command CONST Transmission fame pon oa 2 oa em 03 E ASCII code Note H 34 H Q ACK ETX as of control characters of ASCII code are used for Header and Tail Q Received command RD is sent again Q Received data length 24 is sent again Q No BCC 2 User defined programming Procedure sequence in GLOFA PLC for communication via the protocol of other company s PLC in user mode is as follows SetCnetl F module to user defined mode Define TX RX frame via Frame Editor as agreed with other company s protocol And set basic parameters as communication speed etc also to be agreed with the specification of other company s communication If Frame Editor is prepared let it downloaded to Cnet I F module and then run communication Prepare program which can transmit receive frame via GMWIN let it downloaded to PLC CPU and then check the result via program monitor 7 14 Chapter 7 Communication function 3 Preparing frame Prepare basic parameters and frames first via Frame Editor according to programming sequence As it is communication system via RS 422 channel set communication channel to RS 422 as shown in Figure7 6 and then set communication speed data stop bits etc to basic parameters Station number in
126. ct GM7 of PLC type Y Creat new project file respectively for master and slave Select communication parameters in GMWIN parameter and double click on it to display the figure below Communicaton Parameter ster Read Status of olave PLG List 7 25 Chapter 7 Communication function Perform setting as below Setting contents Selt station No 0 to 31 station can be set Communication i 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 or 57600 bps is available for setting spee Data bit 7 or 8 bit can be set Parity bit No Even or Odd is available for setting Stop bit 1 or 2 bit can be set e RS232C null modem or RS422 485 selected for communication via GM7 basic units built in function and Cnet I F module G7L CUEC e RS232C dedicated modem selected for dedicated modem communication via Cnet I F module G7L CUEB e RS232C dial up modem selected for normal modem communication by phone connection with other station via Cnet I F module G7L CUEB Communication channel Note RS232C dedicated modem communication and RS232C dial up modem communication are available only in Cnet I F module G 7L CUEB supporting RS232C while unavailable in Cnet I F module G7L CUEC supporting RS 422 485 e Waiting time for response frame after request frame is transmitted to GM7 basic unit set to master Time out when e Default value is 500ms setting master e t needs setting in consideration of max cycle of TX RX in master PLC
127. ct slot number therein and then choose Write button Write Library 5 32 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Remark Notel Do not let program operation escaped from Frame Editor while downloading to flash memory or from Windows program nor let PC or PLC powered off If OS data of flash memory Is ever damaged normal operation of Cnet I F module is unavailable A S shall be requested in this case 6 If library writing is completed the following message will be displayed 5 33 Chapter 5 Frame Editor 5 3 2 Reading of flash memory Read flash memory is for checking the type and the version of O S and other company s driver saved in flash memory of Cnet I F module Reading is allowed in all modes except Loop Back mode with the following procedure as below 1 Select Read flash memory of sub menu in flash memory from online menu of menu bar to display the following screen where to read flash memory information Herein select applicable slot and library and then press Read to check the type and the version of driver downloaded in Cnet I F module oystem Infomation x 2 Select OS in system information and run Read to read the version of Cnet Flash ROM S stem Infomation Ug o a 5 34 Chapter 5 Frame Editor 5 4 Changing of online mode In Cnet Ver 2 0 the operation mode can be changed during operation by setting via Frame Editor besides via mode switch With online mode changeable all for local remote Cnet
128. ct to PLC Read parameters and frame in module Read C WGMWIN3 J SOURCEWCNETWGMB E3 Read Write parameters and frame in module Communication channel to perform Write with depends on communication channel setting in the basic screen Write C WGMWIN3 JWSOURCEWCNETWGMB E3 SiotNo SE 2 Online pe ee Write Temm ee eet Change Run Stop Chapter 5 Frame Editor type Menu function Change operation mode of module in online Online Change Mode SitNo 5t0ro f Online change mode Online Write Read other company s dedicated driver saved in flash memory and check Cnet O S Flash memory version of flash memory Select communication port to use among COM1 COM4 LLM E oh SIDE Se UE Option Port l ee l Display receiving monitor screen indicating data received by module It is activated after connected with PLC Dialog box for selecting port to monitor Slot No Channel Setting Xx Chapter 5 Frame Editor type mew function Receiving monitor screen Monitoring Received Data x Receive frame Chapter 5 Frame Editor 5 2 1 Basic parameter setting Basic parameters are for setting communication specification of communication module to decide communication speed parity data bit stop bit and modem service as required If modem communication is applied command for initializing modem shall be input Command for initializing modem may depend on makers however mostly set t
129. ction SD registration number shall be set the same as the number set to ARRAY segment in frame If input variable in Function Block remains blank compile error may occurs Thus unused SD area as of DUMMY variable shall set memory allocation to Auto and LENGTH to 0 If no data is to be transmitted in other words ARRAY segment registration is not applied in frame registration set all areas of SD1 SD4 to DUMMY variables with LENGTH all set to 0 Figure7 11 shows an example of variable setting of SD area The system of Figure 7 5 has set MBO area of GLOFA PLC to transmit 18 byte thus memory allocation is allocated to MBO as user defined and ARRAY number is set to 18 from 0 to 17 the same as the number to be transmitted Figure 7 11 Setting example of transmission data variable Through the variable setting of transmission data as above 18 byte data Is transmitted from MBO via Write request frame 7 22 Chapter 7 Communication function B Receiving program Figure 7 12 shows an programming example to receive Read data frame RD_ DATA Figure 7 12 Receiving program of Read data frame RCY Aee REY l REY HOR REY ERR RCY Meki mir rlf hE NDR Executes receiving Function Block only when receiving via receiving flag which is turned ON if RD_ DATA Is received Nowe Frame name RO_OATA FMAM LENT Receiving channel number No 1 RS 422
130. ction type to modem and dial up modem and communication port and transmission speed which are set in internal or external modem linked with PC Communication speed as is related with dial up modem performance shall be set similar to that of modem Remark Note 1 Communication speed set in connection option is not for that of modem but for that between PC and modem Communication speed of modem means the communication speed between modems which is automatically set as agreed with the telephoning quality of public line and speed of the other station modem 7 126 Chapter 7 Communication function C Phone number shall be input as of the number of modem side linked to Cnet Extension No and are available if flowed out from local via the extension Ex If extension No is 9 Set to 9 0343 398 xxxx Remark Note 1 If modem connected with Cnet I F module which is set to the other station is via central exchanger normal communication is unavailable Namely if separate extension No is applied in receiving station dial up modem communication is not allowed D Select Remote 1 of connection stages and set the station number Number set in Cnet I F module shall be input Ner 2 0 Remark Note 1 Station No shall be input in Cnet Ver2 0 or later In case of earlier Ver setting of Station No is unnecessary Station No shall be set in frame editor E Select Connect in Online after connection option
131. d Requests data transmission from DTE to DCE Reports data transmission available from DCE CTS Clear To Send to DTE Peet Ring 32 4 Reports ringing tone received from DCE to DTE Channel RS 232C can communicate with external devices directly and also with remote communication devices using s se signatGround_ roundineorsignal R ES modem When connecting modem communication type of RS 232C must be set to modem with Frame Editor and when not using modem it must be set to null modem But when the channel mode Is as interlocked modem can not be connected because it is operated as in null modem even if set to modem Remark Notel DTE Data Terminal Equipment Cnet I F module Note2 DCE Data Communication Equipment external modem Chapter 4 Performance specification 1 How to connect RS 232C connector during modem connection Cnet I F module can communicate with devices of long distance as connected with modem Modem and RS 232C channel shall be connected as in Figure4 4 below Figure 4 4 Cable connection between RS 232C and modem Connection No and signal direction x xe 2 RxD o3 m o4 om C se LE 7 RTS CTS Tats Tats as ors Cas o ams Ca Note No 9 RI signal is not used in Cnet I F module CD RXD TXD DTR SG RTS CTS e 6 2 How to connect connector for RS 232C in null modem mode In null modem connector can be connecte
132. d by the other station along with transmission monitor function to view the data transmitted from self station 1 Receiving monitor Receiving monitor views the data transmitted from external devices via Cnet I F module using Cnet module If basic parameters of Cnet I F module are set correctly as agreed with communication type the receiving monitor can fill the role of monitoring regardless of different frame definition or station number setting to inspect communication status as required A First run Frame Editor and select Online Connect to connect with CPU B Selectmenu Monitor R eceive Frame to display dialog box for selecting channel to monitor as below Slot No Channel Setting x C Select slotNo and Channel where module is inserted and click on OK button 5 27 Chapter 5 Frame Editor D If the receiving monitor screen as below Is displayed press Start button to startmonitor Monitoring Received Data Previous S tart monitor View previous page available only in view mode Stop monitor Close screen View next page available only in view mode View option 1 HEX View data in HEX Mode selection button 2 ASCII View data in characters 1 Monitor View currently received data 2 View Stop monitor to analyze received data closely E If data is received by Cnet I F module the received data is monitored in the screen as below Moniton
133. d communication frame Command type as in figures data type when main command is R r and W w All items indicating total data size in structured data area Command type registration number for monitor registration and execution command M m All contents in data Frame number of Domain H is attached in front of all data from now to display HEX data This H isn t included in actual frame though Remark Notel If HEX data is applied in front of figures in frame type of data is indicated to be HEX by H like H0O1 H12345 H34 H12 amp H89AB E BCC When main command is one of lower case only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from Header to Tail is converted into ASCII and added to BCC which is checking data of frame error If lower case command Is used in request frame response frame responds also via the same lower case command namely if requested by BCC applied frame Cnet I F module responds also via BCC applied frame Next is an example of BCC calculation with individual reading frame of direct variables Example of BCC at ae ASCII rw lt a JET Tail E in T HOL MW100 ASCII Pe Te oo H3230 H5353 H3031 H3036 H254D57313030 jo H4134 Value ASCII value adding 05 324 30 72453 53 30431 30436 25 4D 57 31 30430 04 H3A4 Lower byte ASCII converting A4 gt ASCII value H4134 BCC value H4134 7 37 Chapter 7 Communication function
134. d frames SND_ MSG Function Block is applied for transmitting and RCV_MSG Function Block is applied for receiving Insert the communication library first into GMWIN project as in the case of other communication Function Blocks in order to use Function Block for user definition Figure 7 4 shows how to insert the communication library in the project screen Choose file of COMMUNI FB per CPU type to insert into its correspondent project Figure 7 4 library insertion into project Library Selection a COMMUNI Efb mkstdib 6fu 1 Transmission Function Block SND_MSG Send Message Figure on the right shows transmission Function Block SND MSG to transmit frames composed for transmission along with user s input data to variable via a defined channel of Cnet I F module The same frame name in FNAM area in the Function Block must be downloaded to Cnet I F module prior to execution of the receive Function Block Since the frames are classified in accordance with their names by the Function Block when transmission frames are being composed in Frame Editor normal communication can not be possible if names of the frames are identical Besides same number of SDx with the number of ARRAY variables is required if ARRAY variables are used in the Frame Editor Table 7 2 shows how to use I O variables of SND_ MSG Function Block Chapter 7 Communication function Table 7 2 I O specification of SND MSG Function Block Data
135. d in 7 wire with handshake or 3 wire without handshake type Figure 4 5 as of 7 wire connection shows connection drawing when controlling CD Carrier Detect signal line by external devices Figure 4 5 Connection of 7 wire type with handshake Computer communication Cnet 9 P IN ee Connection No and signal direction devices Chapter 4 Performance specification If CD signal is not controlled by external devices it must be connected in 3 wire type connection as in Figure 4 6 Recent PC does not control CD signal line so when connecting with PC it must be connected in 3 wire type Figure 4 6 Connection of 3 wire type without handshake Computer communication Cnet 9 P IN l 2 l Connection No and signal direction devices Remark Notel When in null modem communication via RS 232C channel wiring without handshake shall be performed on the side of Cnet I F module as in Figure4 6 even if only 3 wires are used in external devices Note2 If not wired as in Figure4 6 transmission in Cnet I F module isn t available however receiving via Cnet I F module is allowed Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 2 2 RS 422 interface Channel RS 422 uses 6 pin connector Terminal Block for communication with external devices The names and functions of pins and data directions are as shown in Figure 4 7 below Figure 4 7 Pin specifications of 6 pin connector for RS 422 l Signal direction S Pi
136. d line No flash receiving 3 Check cable connection between module and dedicated modem Check if data is transmitted from the other station s dedicated modem Check if communication speeds of dedicated modem and module are identical OFF 2 Check if data bit setting of dedicated modem is identical with calculated basic setting values of module 3 Check connection of cable Download communication type of RS 232C channel as set to dedicated modem via Frame Editor Let channel operation mode set to stand alone mode 4 LED display amp Troubleshooting for dedicated modem Since LED specification for dedicated modem differs according to makers user s manual for modem shall be referred to Table4 5 describes how to troubleshoot in dedicated modem based on common specification of LED display Table4 7 Checklist for dedicated module s LED LED type If abnormal Action to take 1 If module s TX LED doesn t flash follow LED Checklist to troubleshoot TXD Flash OFF 2 fmodule s TX LED flashes check cable connection between module and dedicated modem 4 25 Chapter 4 Performance specification lf normal if abnormal 1 Check if data is transmitted from the other station s dedicated modem 2 Check status of dedicated line 3 Check connection status of dedicated line 1 IfTXD LED doesn t flash either follow the action for TXD LED to troubleshoot 1 Flash if in 2 Check cable connection between module and dedicated transmis
137. d turn MON 2 flag on which turns on monitoring timer of Read yee response frame ne ERR MON _ ROAK NOR After Read response frame is received set WR_START flag to IR START as send Write request frame and turn on MON 2 flag so as to stop 1 sc sec timer MON _ y BETTON al rr roe If no response is received for 1 sec after Read ee a request frame is sent turn on WR START to Wis PT E send Write request frame so as to allow next ml frame transmitted even in abnormal state through this interlock program Prepare one program integrated by 4 programs above and let it downloaded to PLC through compile process and then run the program to allow communication with dedicated communication slave station in user defined mode Identical frame list and program can be also used in Cnet station 2 amp 3 And if the program is run via compile and download identical communication is available in station 2 amp 3 Remark Notel Waiting time for response shall be set larger enough than max response time estimated in consideration of frame length and data transmission speed Chapter 8 Exercising program 8 3 GMWIN connection using dial up modem Cnet I F module has a remote communication function via telephone line With this function in the system as shown in Figure 8 11 connect external modem to module and apply GMWIN connection via dial up modem in PC to change programs and to monitor variables as described below F
138. de File is too long Data or file is too large Illegal data type Transaction size plus word address is too large Invalid parameter or invalid data 7 118 Chapter 7 Communication function 5 GLOFA PLC Address Mapping Direct variable areas of GLOFA PLC are M Q and l areas AB Asynchronous Link communication driver has access to 2K bytes of M area which is an internal memory area and B3 area amp N7 area of AB PLC 5 are mapped to M area Only Bit area B3 and Integer area N7 among PLC 5 file types are accessible Because bit command is mapped to MX area and word command Is to MW area access to different area is not allowed Table4 30 describes data memory mapping between AB PLC 5 and GLOFA PLC Table 7 30 GLOFA PLC Address Mapping of AB communication driver AB PLC 5 Address GLOFA PLC Address Support Output O Xxx Xxx is octal Not Available Not supported in AB l xxx xxx is octal Not Available communication driver Bit YES og B3 MW Xxx ae eae lime XXX gt MW MW xxx xxx 0 999 Word value ae 0 15 Bit value Added file for File number Not supported in AB Not Available extension 9 999 communication driver Remark Note 1 In Cnet I F module access to other areas than Bit amp Integer areas of AB PLC 5 is not allowed Error is responded to the other areas than set to support allowed in the table As described in Table 7 30 AB PLC 5 B3 area amp N7 area are mapped tog
139. dem connection as set differently by Frame Editor Figure4 10 shows long distance communication using dedicated modem Figure 4 10 Example of dedicated modem communication Cnet al oncenessanse eo RS 232C CABLE RS 232C Cable MODEM Dedicated line MODEM Connection sequence of this module to the modem is as below Set the basic parameter of Cnet I F module as agreed with modem Set the initial value of dedicated modem or dial up modem aS A Connect modem to Cnet I F module with modem connection cable A If abnormal Power on Cnet I F module and modem and check if LED on a ee Cetera troubleshooting If normal Modem communication starts operation 4 19 Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 4 1 Connection to dedicated modem RS 232C 4 4 1 1 Modem selection Performance of dedicated modem communication with Cnet I F module depends on the condition and status of dedicated modem and dedicated line Since low performance modem or inferior line causes deterioration of communication the modem as specified below is recommended for reliable communication Communication speed More than 2400 bps Flow control CTS RTS Flow Control F ull duplex Half duplex 2 line 4 line RTS CTS delay Within 500msec 4 4 1 2 How to connect dedicated modem with Cnet I F module Connect dedicated modem with Cnet I F module via RS 232C channel using 9 pin cable as wired as below 4 20 Chapter 4 P
140. e E ditor Remark Note1 G7L CUEC does not use Frame Editor and is designed to be set automatically by communication parameter of GMWIN 4 10 Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 3 How to set transmission specifications 4 3 1 Setting items Transmission specifications of transmission speed and data type of data stop bit are set by Frame Editor in this module Accordingly user is required to set the following items in accordance with the transmission specifications of the system to be used Transmission specifications set via Frame Editor are to write by Cnet I F module Since the contents with the writing completed are saved in flash memory of computer link inside they are still saved as unchanged if powered off until re written in Frame Editor In stand alone mode channels RS 232C RS 422 shall be set separately In interlocking mode only RS 232C needs setting because they are operated by transmission specifications of RS 232C channel Table 4 3 Transmission specifications Setting value Data Bit Data Stop Bit ba cies Ges in stand alone mode ype StartBit channels of RS 232C RS Even Odd None 422 operate separately Sa 300 600 1200 2400 4800 PENE Transmission speed bps 38400bps and if in interlocking mode 9600 19200 38400 76800Mote2 they are operated in RS RS 232C channel mode Modem null modemnote31 Null modem 232C setting mode dedicated modem RS 422 channel mode RS 422 RS 485INoted RS 4
141. e if the operation mode is incorrectly set operation failure may occur Set station No for the channels used in dedicated communication mode Cnet I F modules of identical station No shall not be applied in one network for RS 422 485 communication system in dedicated communication mode If repeated Station No is applied for RS 422 communication normal communication is not allowed as in error Use the communication cable as specified only If not serious error may occur to communication Check communication cable if disconnected or shorted prior to installation Tighten up communication cable connector until connected firmly If cable connection is unstable serious error may occur to communication RS 422 485 cables must be connected correctly for TX R X If several stations are connected TX and RX shall be connected with each other between the first 2 stations and TX to TX RX to RX shall be connected between other Stations than those RS 422 communication If in RS 485 communication TX and RX of Cnet I F module is to be connected with each other Refer to Chapter 3 in the manual for details If communication cable is twisted as shown below or connected incorrectly communication error may occur DI SPLAY j 3 n K RI Cay RI we rN US NS test iad ill bi 10 4 Chapter 10 Installation and Testing operation 9 Cable bifurcation for RS 422 communication is not allowable 10 If remote communication cable is connected ke
142. e channel 6 If mode is set as required select Write button to change modes If modes are changed the following message will be displayed to indicate operation mode completed Note1 Notel If mode change Is written communication of RS 232C RS 422 channel is disconnected for approx 1 second to convert operation into newly changed mode and then is automatically operated again in changed mode after mode change is completed 5 41 Chapter 5 Frame Editor 7 If the message below is shown the mode switch of one Cnet I F module is not No 9 online mode Change mode switch of Cnet I F module to No 9 online mode reset PLC and execute again from No 1 iNote Response NAK P mi A Teed ber A ese bee I one Note1 Both Cnet I F modules of PLC A PLC B shall be set to No 9 online mode 8 Ifthe message below Is shown version of Cnet I F module is below Ver 2 0 Online mode change is unavailable Response NAK w sees Font el fem es bre Remark Note1 Both Cnet modules of PLC A PLC B shall be of Ver 2 0 Note2 Error above may occur where communication error is expected in status of modem communi cation Note3 If communication in a cycle of within 20msec is overloaded set CPU mode of PLC to Stop and then change the operation mode Where communication is overloaded error in mode change may occur 9 The changed mode is saved in flash memory of module as kept even if powered off 5 42 Chapter
143. e connection again via telephoning Chapter 8 Exercising program 8 4 Communication with GOLDSEC Mj UC24 With user defined mode in this module communication with different model of device is available through function to define other company s protocol via Frame Editor in user defined mode Next is how to communicate via GOLDSEC MJ 71C24 computer link communication module of GOLDSEC PLC in GLOFA PLC Figure 8 12 shows system configuration for communication with GOLDSEC PLC via RS 422 channel 12 word data is read from D0100 of GOLDSEC PLC to save in starting MW50 of GLOFA PLC in order while GOLDSEC PLC is set to station 1 Figure 8 12 Communication between GLOFA PLC and GOLDSEC PLC GLOFA PLC GOLDSEC PLC 1 RS 422 Interface 8 4 1 Exercising program As shown in Figure 8 12 Cnet I F module operates as a master station in user defined mode If total Read command of memory word unit is applied among dedicated protocols of GOLDSEC PLC continuous reading of D area in GOLDSEC PLC is available Set mode and basic setting items of Cnet I F module and then prepare frame and GMWIN program for this service 1 Setting items As in communication via RS 422 channel of Cnet I F module set operation mode and basic parameters for RS 422 channel Table 8 7 describes setting items of Cnet I F module Table 8 7 Setting items RS 422 channel setting item Setting contents Operation mode Mode 2 user defined mode RS 232C channel
144. e of 120Q to both ends of cable Also when using other cable than recommended the same resistance 1 2W as characteristic impedance of cable must be connected to both ends of cable 1 How to connect terminating resistance during RS 422 connection Q GM3 4 6 unit PLC 1 PLC 2 PLC N 1 PLC N Q GM7 unit PLC N 1 PLC N 3 5 Chapter 3 Product specification 2 How to connect terminating resistance during RS 485 connection Q GM3 4 6 unit elk PLC 1 PLC 2 PLC N 1 PLC N Q GM7 unit PLC 1 PLC 2 PLC N 1 PLC N 3 6 Chapter 3 Product specification 3 5 1 Part names of G3L CUEA EEEE LED displaying Indication of operating status of G3L C UEA section see Appendix A Switch for indication of parameter and Display switch station number see Appendix A Setting of operation mode Mode switch see 4 1 RS 232C RS 232C connector for Connector connection with external devices RS 422 485 RS 422 485 connector for Connector connection with external devices 3 7 Chapter 3 Product specification 3 5 2 Part names of G4L CUEA a LED displaying Indication of operating status of G4L section CUEA see Appendix A Switch for indication of parameter and Display switch station number See Appendix A Setting of operation mode see 4 1 RS 232C RS 232C connector for Connector connection with external devices Mode switch RS 422 485 RS 422 485 connector f
145. e of monitor registration to 4X32 or 16X20 16X20 is only for Cnet I F module Ver 1 4 or later with the following differences Basic Parameters Station M Type Nun Modem F tnt Command Az l Monitor Entry Baud Rate 38400 Data Bit Pa Parity Hone Stop Bit C 16x20 v 4X 32 Registration number up to 32 is supported with max 4 variables available per monitor registration and with max 4X32 128 as the variable number available for the registration in all Cnet versions not below than Ver 1 0 v 16 X 20 Registration number up to 20 is supported with max 16 variables available per monitor registration and with max 16X20 320 as the variable number available for the registration in Cnet version 1 4 or later only v G7IL CUEC Registration number up to 10 is supported with max 16 variables available per monitor registration and with max 16X10 160 as the variable number available for the registration however NAMED variables are not supported 2 Request format PC gt PLC Registration Station No Command A Registration format ea lolol a al v BCC When command is one of lower case x only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ENQ to EOT is converted into ASCII and added to BCC ASCII value 7 69 Chapter 7 Communication function v Registration number can be registered up to 32 or up to 20 0 31 HOO H1F according to setting value of monitor registration
146. e sere ete ete ete e etc e esc ceeccescceescessceessenssenssessscescens 2 1 2 6 Chapter 3 Product specification Pere errr rere ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 3 1 3 12 3 1 General specification Cee eee cree eee en cece reece eres sees seers es Sees e seer esses essere eeeseseesesessseeeees 3 1 3 2 Performance specifications cesooooeeeoooooooooooosooooooooooooooooooooecesoooooooocosoooooooooeeeoooooooo 3 2 3 3 Cable specifications ceseesoooesocosooooeooooosoooosooooesooooesooosooooesoooesosooooooeesooosoooocooooeoooo 3 4 34 Terminating resistance eeeseeseeeececseeesooooseoooooseooooossooooooeooosooseoooooseoooooseooooooee 3 5 3 5 Structure s eeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeccoooooeeecoooooeeecoooooooececooooeeeecccooooececooooeeececoooooececooooeoeee 3 7 3 5 1 Partnames of G3L CUEA Commerce reece rece r cee r sees sees sseeessseesseesseesseesseesseesseesseesseesees 3 7 3 5 2 Partnames of G4L CUEA Cece r cree eee cenns cece seen seers seers ss eessse sess ssses cesses sseesseessessees 3 8 3 5 3 Part names of GOL CUEB cocccccc certs ccc ccc esc cc cc ccscecc ccs ceneseeeeeeeccccascesessseecssssscssesees 3 9 3 5 4 Part names of GOL CUEC seeeessesessesesesssoooeseooooseooooseoososesoooososesososeososooooseoooseoo 3 10 3 5 5 Partnames of G7L CUEB Coe cere cere cere ree e reer nsec sss seeeee seeeees seceesseesrsseesssesssseesseees 3 1 3 5 6 Part names of GIL CUEC eeeeseseessesessesoseessssesoossosesososossesesooossososesososesososesosees 3
147. ead Q In case of G6L CUEC module equipped with RS 422 channel only changing of the remote operation mode is not allowed Figure 5 14 shows an example of system structure where operation mode of remote Cnet I F module is changed No 9 mode switch REMOTE Cnet rs 232c cable rs 232c cable Dedicated modem pediesied line Dedicated modem Figure5 14 System structure where remote operation mode is changeable The following describes how to change PLC B mode and how to change and download program via Cnet in the system as shown in Figure 5 14 below 1 Setlocal remote Cnet to No 9 online mode and supply power 2 Change local PLC A to STOP mode 3 Check if communication of RS 232C channel between PLC A B is normal and then connect Frame Editor to local PLC A Successively select change menu of operation mode to display setting screen of operation mode as in the figure 5 40 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Online Change Mode x 4 Setslot No 0 where Cnet I F module is mounted and connection stage to remote in online mode change 5 Select desired type of channel operation from channels of interlocking and stand alone Note Remark Note1 Setting values are valid only in RS 232C channel for G6L CUEB and only in RS 422 channel for G6L CUEC In case of two types of modules the operation isn t available in interlocking mode Basic value if not set is user mode all for RS 232C RS 422 in stand alon
148. ed COMMUNICatlonessccrrcrrrscc cess ste t eee teee ee eeseeeccssseccccsecnces 7 95 7 3 3 How to use dedicated Function BloCKesssecc cess secre tstte eee ceeseecccccsseeeccscscnecccssceevees 7 97 7 3 4 Dedicated communication master for G7L CUEC Se i 7 102 7 4 Other company s dedicated mode ceccsrccccsscccssccceeseeccsseeccssecccsscccssecccsssescsssevccens 7 109 7 4 1 Introduction cesecoocooooooosocoosocoocoosocooooooocoooooooooooosooooooosoooosooooooosooooooocosoooooo 7 109 1 4 2 Operating mode amp downloading of communication driver sseseeeeeeesereeeeserereeseeeeeeseeeeees 7 110 7 4 3 Specifications OF A B communication driver cece rts c cree tet t ttt t teeter e eee e ee eeeeeceseeeceeees 7 114 1 Aa Speciicatlons Or MODBUS COMMUNICATION GIVER EAEE PAESE R 7 119 7 5 GMWIN remote connection Se i i i i i i 7 122 7 5 1 Introduction Cee meer reece reece rere sere sere eee e eee eee e sees eee sees eee sees eee eeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseseeene 7 122 7 5 2 GMWIN remote connection Cee meer reece ence rece sere eres eee eees essere eee sesseesseseeseessessesees 7 122 7 5 3 Remote connection between Cnet F modules ecesososososososoooosocosososososocoooooooocoooooo 7 129 Chapter 8 Exercising program ceecooesocoocsocooecocsocoooooocoosooooocoooooooesoosoocoosoosoosooooosooooo 8 1 8 66 8 1 TM Tele Metering system using dedicated MOdeMsscerccrrcccccssscccsssccccssseccsssecccssccccccens 8 1 8 1 1 Exercising program SO aE ge Ome ET renee arc NE PE OP PE ER oP SFr PS RNP TRE
149. ed from HEX type and the range is from HOL ASCII value 3031 to H1O ASCII value 3130 v Direct variable It means address of variable to be read actually in ASCII value within 16 characters Others than figure upper lower cases and are not allowed for this variable name Variable type available for continuous writing of directvariables is as follows according to PLC type 7 62 Chapter 7 Communication function Classification BOOL WORD DOUBLE WORD LONG WORD oom Of MB QB IB MW QW IW MD QD ID ML QL IL ooma eee MB QB IB MW QW IW MD QD ID ML OL IL MB QB IB SMW QW IW MD QD ID em sem 98 516 cme sma 98 618 xm moon o me MB QB IB SMW QW IW MD QD ID Remark Note 1 Refer to technical spec of GLOFA PLC for details to specify the area of each device in GLOFA GM Note 2 Data type of LONG WORD isn t supported in GM3 GM4 GM6 and GM7 2 Request format for ACK response Da _ i ee a 1538 oo DES v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case w only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response Error code Header Station No Command Command type Tail Frame check HEX 2Byte omm s ma Frame E
150. ed in flash memory of Cnet I F module can be confirmed by reading through Frame Editor or checking through LED display How to read basic parameters through Frame Editor is specified as follows refer to Appendix A LED indication specification for checking through LED display 1 Select Online Connect in basic screen of Frame Editor to finish the connection with PLC How to connect is same as in 4 3 2 2 Select Online R ead to display the dialog box below if the connection has been completed Enter Cnet slotNo communication type and communication option herein and then select R ead Head untitled frm SitNo OE emg If reading is finished the basic values which have been read are displayed in basic screen of Frame Editor and can be saved in a file 4 16 Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 3 4 Transmission specification setting of GM7 series Transmission specification of GM7 series is composed as Set inside the communication parameter of GMWIN without Frame Editor 1 Select and execute the communication parameter after GMWIN is started Potted tor Windows c Std dab JeWsource def0002 a i lc Bubba 3e E P PROJECT gt PLC Type GM COMFIGURATIONCPLO gt Configuration Name UNNAMED E ACCESS VARIABLES A variables declared RESOURCECCPUD A Name RESO B TASK DEFINITIONS gt 1 tasks defined DE LD 1 PROGRAM gt INST E COMMENTS for DIRECT VARIABLES PARAMETERS E B
151. em 8 If telephoned by the other modem prior to modem initializing the module doesn t respond out of normal communication 4 4 2 4 Answering to telephone and modem communication If modem in local connection is initialized normally communication with PLC is available by telephoning via the other modem However this module supports not telephoning via Cnet but only answering function to telephone If in the state of on line connection by telephoning data communication in long distance is allowed via modem and the on line state Is maintained as itis until the telephone is hung up by the other station compulsorily or by communication error LED display of Cnet I F module in normal communication status is described as follows 4 31 Chapter 4 Performance specification LED status during normal communication GAL CUEA RUN BPS TX BPS RX BPS ACK DATA RUN BPS TX BPS RX BPS ACK DATA NAK PARITY miala VAAN om D D MODEM STOP SYS RUN RS 232C SYS ERR RS 422 NAK PARITY ERR EVEN ODD RS 485 STOP RUN BPS always ON TX BPS if in transmission ON RX BPS if in receiving ON 4 4 2 5 Troubleshooting for dial up modem communication 1 Modem communication of module can be checked if operated normally through LED display Refer to Checklist in Table4 6 to shoot the trouble Table4 8 Checklist for module s LED pun lon lore 1 Run RS 232C channel operation using Frame Edi
152. ens 6 10 6 2 2 GMWIN connection using RS 422 channel of Cnet I F module teeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeses 6 11 Chapter 7 Communication program eesesosoooooooocosococooooooooocoooooocoooooooocococooooooooooooooo 7 1 7 132 7 1 User defined COMMUNICATION se e eeeeeeeeseeseeseeseesecsossecooosocooosososososososocooosooosososooose 7 1 7 1 1 Introduction Cee meee creer reer cere eens eres e eee eee ee sees sees eee sees eee sees sees eee seer eeeeeeeeeeseeeseeone 1 1 7 1 2 User defined operation Cece Te UT ee ee ee A ETTE ry 7 1 3 User defined Function Block SND MSG RCV MSG Se ee ee a 1 5 7 1 4 Example of user defined programming Serer ee ee eee ee ee ee eee 7 12 7 1 5 User defined COMMUNICATION FOr GM serjes cocrrccc erste cs cess steer seeee cesses eeccsscecccssccnces 7 25 7 2 Dedicated communication SlAVE s es eeeesesssesessesesseseoossoooosoososoososoososoooosoososeosoeeos 7 34 7 2 1 Introduction See 7 34 7 2 2 Frame structure corer creer tect teeter teeter cece eee en ener ase senaensesssssssssesssesssessssssesseseeees 7 35 7 2 3 Listof commands crrrrrcc erst cette tte eee e teen tesa eee eeeeee eee eeaeeeeeeesseeeseseseneessseeeeeees 7 38 7 2 4 Data type Se ii 7 40 7 2 5 Execution of commands Ex Cee meee reer cere cence reese eee e sense eee eessessereseees oooooooooooooooo 7 42 7 3 Dedicated communication master communication between Crets sr rrtrrr eters eters eter ceees 7 94 7 3 1 Introduction Sn i i i 7 94 7 3 2 Function Block for dedicat
153. ep the cable away from power line or conductible noise or let it sheltered if necessary 11 For connection with Cnet I F module on rotative or mobile body previously check communication cable if possibly disconnected due to repetitive motion And if danger of disconnection is ever expected let system configured to allow communication via optical modem or wireless modem The figure below shows system configuration via RF modem Wireless modem Wireless modem Cnet 1 station Cnet 1 station i F F F a F F RS 232C interface RS 232C interface 12 If in modem communication connect Cnet module with modem via modem connection cable and then with dedicated line or public line 13 If LED operation is notnormal refer to Chapter 11 Troubleshooting in this manual to inspectthe cause and take action based on action items If yet not normal contact service station 10 5 Chapter 10 Installation and Testing operation 10 1 3 Testing operation This describes the preparations to be confirmed before and after the testing operation 1 Check items until testing operation is started Checking items prior to testing operation of communication module are introduced below Table 10 2 Check items for testing operation Is the applied voltage of power module as in its specification l l s the battery of CPU module connected Basic module mounting l l Is entire basic module mounted desirably Refer to
154. er 2 0 are so displayed as with Iver 2 0 and the functions displayed with the mark above are available not in the former versions but only in Ver 2 0 1 7 Chapter 2 Definition of terms Chapter 2 Definition of terms This chapter describes the communication terms used in this user s manual 1 Communication type A Simplex This is the communication type that data is transferred in constant direction Information can not be transferred in the reverse direction B Half Duplex Data is transferred in two way with one cable if time interval provided though it can t be transferred simultaneously C Full Duplex Data is simultaneously transferred and received in two way with two cables 2 Transmission type This is divided into the following 2 types in consideration of the speed safety and economy on transmission in binary bit composed of 0 and 1 A Serial transmission This type transmits bitby bit via 1 cable The speed of transmission is slow but the cost of installation is low and the software is simplified RS 232C RS 422 and RS 485 are the examples KAEN CA AEA 76543210 7654321 2 1 Chapter 2 Definition of terms B Parallel transmission This type is used in printer etc which transmits data in unit of 1 byte so the speed is high and the accuracy of data is reliable However the longer the transmission distance is the higher the cost of installation is geometrically Bodo 3 Asynch
155. ered on If modem has been successfully initialized Cnet LED is displayed as below Cnet I F module LED status in stand by mode G4L CUEA RUN BPS RUN BPS TX BPS TX BPS RX BPS RX BPS ACK DATA ACK DATA NAK PARITY NAK PARITY RUN BPS ALWAYS ON MODEM STOP ALWAYS ON SYS RUN DIMLY ON ERR EVEN ODD ERR EVEN ODD MODEM STOP RS 485 STOP SYS RUN SYS ERR RS 232C RS 422 The figure above shows the case that modem has been initialized normally If not initialized TX LED will flash in a cycle of 1 sec in the figure If so refer to Chapter 4 How to connect to dial up modem in the manual to shoot the trouble Chapter 8 Exercising program 4 Telephoning and remote connection If modem has been initialized Cnet I F module waits for telephoning and remote connection from GMWIN in connection stand by status Since Cnet I F module has no telephoning function install modem on PC where GMWIN is mounted on to connect through telephoning Next is how to make a phone call in GMWIN A Install modem on PC Internal modem can be applied to PC side B Run GMWIN program and select method of connection from connect option in project option Set method of connection type to modem and dial up modem and communication port and transmission speed which are set in internal or external modem linked with PC Communication speed as is related with dial up modem performance Shall be set similar to that of modem
156. erformance specification 4 4 1 3 Dedicated modem setting Most dedicated modems are designed to set operation mode via dip switch or LED display window according to modem manufacturers Operation type needs setting as agreed with communication type with Cnet I F module referring to user s manual for modem The following items related to communication with Cnet I F module shall be set Setting contents a Select according to modem speed and Communication speed OS Same as Cnet I F module Status of communication line fore contot oncompulsony PO Communicaton mode setaccoringt sinetine Remark Notel Data type needs setting agreed with communication type of Cnet I F module as in asynchronous type as Supported only by Cnet I F module The number of bits shall be calculated according to setting values of data bit stop bit parity bit of basic parameters in Cnet I F module Start bit of Cnet I F module is always set to 1 and parity bit possesses 1 bit regardless of Even Odd The table below shows an example of setting the number of bits according to basic parameters set in Cnet stot data Stop tavays 8 1 f None ips f a 8s1 0 10bis amy 7 o ewn ows 147t0 1 9b 4 4 1 4 How to set Cnet I F module shall be set to stand alone channel for dedicated modem communication and is regardless of operation mode available to communicate distantly via dedicated modem in all the modes of user defined dedicated communicati
157. es in HEX And Its contents after converted to HEX data from ASCII code are composed as below Table7 20 STATUS data Format Data ye Status deta sequencelHEX dt UINT PC_DEVICE_IDENTIFIER lNote 1 HOO L HO1 H Honore Byte Physical Note 11 CPU TYPE lt VER NUM 7 56 Chapter 7 Communication function 408 al HODIN HOclL HOdtH WORD Reserved H0e L HOF H WORD O L HIM Remark Note 1 For the details on each flag see flag list in technical spec of GLOFA PLC CPU Do not process PC DEVICE IDENTIFIER and Logical P hysical which are used as dedicated to system 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response a Command Error code Frame Header Command Tail type HEX 2 Byte Aya ETX ASCII 03 3041 5272 5354 31313332 value v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see Appendix B Error Code Table 1 57 Chapter 7 Communication function 4 Example of use When the STATUS of PLC with station No 1 is read Computer request format Frame Header Station No Command Command type Tail check ASC val oo ao psa Se For PLC ACK response after e
158. esponse format for PLC NAK response 7 70 Chapter 7 Communication function Re ae anata Te m er ec asclvaue Hoe 43146 was w ooo v Station number commands and register No are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case x only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see Appendix B Error Code Table 5 Example of use In case of monitor registration of No 1 in station No 1 with data type ofuintand variable name of ASDF Computer request format ee E a a a ascivane mo wan ns a mos For PLC NAK response after execution of command Frame trometexy max non a a leaa ee a a l al a 7 71 Chapter 7 Communication function Cl Monitor execution Y This is a function to execute the reading of variable registered by monitor registration This also specifies registered No and execute the reading of variable registered in that number 1 Request format PC gt PLC Asia a iaso eus m v Registration No is to be the same as the registered No during monitor registration for monitor execution BCC When command is one of lower case y only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from
159. essooeoeooeossosesooeooeosooeososeoes A 7 A 2 2 Error code for dedicated slave communication eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseseseesesoeoesoeosoooososooeosooeososeoes A 9 A 2 3 Error code for dedicated master communication s e eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesseeeseessesosoosoooosoooosoosoosooseoeeo A 11 A 3 Dimensions of appearance CCRT eT eT TET ETC REET CERT TTR TREE TE TEER EET CT TT COR EEO eT ee A 12 Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction This user s manual describes Cnet Computer network I F module of GLOFA PLC network system Cnet is GLOFA PLC network system using computer link module Cnet has the connection function with different model to communicate with communication devices of various different type protocols such as other company s PLC and computer etc and the function of modem communication to control remote PLC and it has the following characteristics Q Because communication speed and communication mode protocol etc are directly controlled by user using program operative in Frame Editor of Windows environment connection with other company s products Is easy Q Separate operations by channels are available through controlling each of other company s protocol for channels RS 232C and RS 422 RS 485 and saving and using the protocol data controlled by user in internal flash memory 128kbyte are possible Q Variable reading writing and programreading writing are possible by using dedicated protocol Q Dedicated communication
160. ether in MW area of GLOFA PLC Namely AB PLC 5 B3 0 area amp N7 0 area are mapped in MWO area of GLOFA PLC in the range of MWO MW999 which Is the range of B3 N7areas of AB PLC 5 Figure 7 21 describes GLOFA PLC address mapping for WORD area 7 119 Chapter 7 Communication function Figure 7 21 WORD area mapping of AB communication driver AB PLC 5 Address GLOFA PLC Address MW998 MW999 Figure 7 22 describes mapping of GLOFA PLC and AB communication driver for access to BIT area Figure 7 22 MAPPING BIT area of AB communication driver AB PLC 5 Address GLOFA PLC Address MW 0 00 MW1 01 MW 999 14 MW 999 15 As shown in Figure 7 21 amp Figure 7 22 access to BIT area and WORD area of GLOFA PLC via AB communication driver is available in the range of MW0 MW999 for WORD area and MW0 0 MW999 15 for BIT area 7 120 Chapter 7 Communication function Remark Note 1 In Cnet I F module access to other areas than Bit amp Integer areas of AB PLC 5 is not allowed Error is responded to the other areas than set to support allowed in the table Because B3 area amp N7 area of AB PLC 5 mean the same M area in GLOFA PLC access to repeated area may be applied Ex B3 100 MW2100 N7 100 MW100 same area in GLOFA PLC 7 121 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 4 4 Specifications of MODBUS communication driver It is communication specifications for communication via MOD
161. f 1 sec and checks the data if received exactly through Loop Back channel and then displays the result on LED If normal all LEDs shall be OFF when LED display switch is pressed down If abnormal in communication the number of errors per channel is displayed on LED display of LED No 0 7 for the test result of RS 232C channel and LED No 8 15 for the test result of RS 422 channel Table 9 3 describes how to calculate the number of errors on the basis of the displayed value on LED Table 9 3 Error counter value when LED display switch is pushed RS 232C error counter value HEX RS 422 error counter value HEX LED BIT value Conversion method LED BIT value Conversion method 1 03 Counter values calculated 1 Counter values calculated by Co ee by converting binary into converting binary into HEX 1 D2 D3 HEX regarding DO as lower D4 regarding DO as lower bit and D5 D6 0 a bit and D7 bit D7 bit it and D7 as upper bi as upper bi 6 D6 14 5 1 D z Example of calculation Calculation of the number of errors when LED No DO D2 amp D5 are turned ON 2 2 2 14 4 4 64 69 Calculation of the number of errors when LED No D1 D5 amp D7 are turned ON 2 2 2 2 32 128 162 Remark Note1 If Cnet I F module is normal and connection of Loop Back Test is correctly applied the number of errors Shall be 0 and if displaying button is pushed all LEDs are to be OFF Note
162. f basic parameters between PC and communication module Monitor data is not correctly received during TX monitor operation Table 11 5 NAK transmission during slave communication in dedicated mode Error code Error indication Error contents e Protocol disagreement of dedicated communication frame e Bad cable connection e Disagreement of communication basic parameters NAK frame is sent to as response to request frame of other station NAK LED 4 12 of Cnet I F module flashes Table 11 6 No response during slave communication in dedicated mode No response is sent to request frame of e Incorrectly specified station No of frame editor ERR 9 other station e Bad cable connection Table 11 7 GMWIN connection error Error code Error indication Error contents e Operation mode setting error in Cnetl F module ERR 10 Mogen ear COV ant Mua katman e Disagreeable initialization command of modem not performed e Bad connection with cable and telephone line 11 2 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 11 2 Troubleshooting by each error code 11 2 1 Error code ERR 1 ERR 2 Hardware amp System error Hardware S ystem error Is LED error code 5 Operation mode switch is set incorrect Is LED error code 7 Correct the setting and then supply power Is LED error code 8 N Is LED error code 3 or 4 Contact service station Yy Y _ Ree E E CP
163. f execution of Function Block error code is output by identification code for the error If ERR is vanished STATUS is also vanished to 0 STATUS USINT l For details of error codes refer to Table 7 4 Error codes in user defined Function Block LENX x 1 23 4 USINT Outputs the received data length of the setsegment in a unit of byte X 1 2 3 Remark Note 1 If Udata _RCV is used for FNAM specifying frame name in RCV_MSG Function Block all the data received to the specified area in RD1 of RCV_MSG Function Block are saved irrelevantly to the frame list downloaded to Cnet I F module In this case LEN1 displays the number of received data Savable up to 256 byte This function is especially used to receive all the data prepared by the protocol which is hard to write via Frame Editor If Udata RCV is used all the data to be received are received without frame searching so it cannot be used with theother different receiving frames Besides several Udata RCVs can t be used at the same time so is available for one module 3 Receiving flag _ RCVx_232 i RCVx_422 i If the frame agreed with the downloaded frame via Cnet I F module is received Cnet I F module lets the flag ON indicating the receiving completed to inform user of the receiving status of the required data for program Differently from transmission execution time of receiving Function Block can t be known because the receiving point of time can
164. f local PLC in direct variable byte type where data to read from the other station is saved used for GM_RD FB Ex MB40 MB1000 Turned On after the service is finished without error as kept On until the next Function Block is called Turned On when error occurs as a result of execution of the Function Block as kept On until the next Function Block is called If ERR is set error code is displayed on STATUS output STATUS USINT Error code If ERR is 1 If NDR is 1 itis 0 In dedicated Function Block frame definition is unnecessary in Frame Editor differently from user defined mode and data of the other station can be read or written via only Function Block above however Cnet I F module operated as a master Station shall be surely of Ver 2 0 or later though slave Cnet I F module operated as the other station is of the former version The other station No shall be as specified via Frame Editor if the station number is different slave Cnet I F 7 99 Chapter 7 Communication function module does not respond 7 3 3 How to use dedicated Function Block describes how to communicate between Cnets via dedicated Function Block 1 Example of use describes how to program for communication between station 1 as master and 2 amp 3 stations as slaves via RS 485 channel between Cnet I F modules in the system configuration shown as in Figure 7 16 It is supposed that master Station 1 reads saves 10 bytes of MB100 area data of st
165. g device to station 4 50 bytes data is written from MB100 address of station 1 and 10 bytes data of 50 bytes starting from MB140 address is re transmitted to station 4 to change data between monitoring device and station 4 1 Optical modem connection Connect 9 pin cable with Cnet stations 1 2 3 and optical modem via RS 232C channel Since optical modem connection is same as in dedicated modem refer to 4 4 How to connect to modem for connection between Cnet I F module and dedicated modem Optical modem on mobile body is connected with Cnet I F module station 4 via RS 422 cable thus use optical modem which supports RS 422 communication for connection in accordance with RS 422 s standard connection method 2 Setting of basic parameters Identical basic parameters shall be set in RS 422 channel of Cnet stations 1 2 3 for communication with monitoring device and RS 232C channel shall be set to dedicated modem mode in operation of user mode to operate as a communication master station of Cnet station 4 Table 8 4 describes setting items of Cnet I F module for this Set operation mode switch as specified in the table and prepare basic parameters through Frame Editor to download to Cnet I F module and then to complete basic setting Table 8 4 seting items of Cnet I F module Cnet on fixed body Cnet on mobile body Operation made swich P User defined Operation mode ie communication ote Parameters In RS 232C Station No Basic
166. gh downloads in Internet Home Page of LG Industrial Systems http www lgis lg co kr fa This manual is based on Frame Editor Ver 2 0 for instruction of its functions Basic functions of Frame Editor are as follows Q Setting of basic parameters Q Frame edit for user mode Q Reading Writing of frame and basic parameters Q Switching of module operation Q Monitoring of TX RX frame I Saving of frame and parameter files 2 Change of online mode Q Management of flash memory Frame Editor can be used with its execution program of FEDIT20 EXE as copied to desired folder and run without additional installation Remark Notel GM7 series doesn t use Frame Editor Parameter and protocol required for communication can be composed in communication parameters inside GMWIN Chapter 5 Frame Editor 5 2 Screen configuration and menu Figure 5 1 shows the initial screen when Frame Editor is run for setting of communication channel basic parameters and frame Figure 5 1 Basic screen of Frame Editor Radio button to n x_sseXe6 amp Oe eE Hull Modem T Cer parameters and modem Setting area of basic communication initializing command Information area of defined frame The upper menu bar of Frame Editor has functions described in Table 5 1 Table5 1 Menus a Creat new frame file l Open k 5 2 Chapter 5 Frame Editor type Mew funtion O O Disconne
167. ght shows receiving Function Block RCV_MSG to receive acy SG frames composed for receiving The received data via specified channel of Cnet ee ee I F module can be received to areas of RD1 RD4 The same frame name in SLOT ERR FNAM area in the Function Block must be downloaded to Cnet I F module prior a to execution of the receive Function Block In addition if ARRAY variables are Tis used in Frame Editor the same number of RDx shall be set as the number of FMAM LENT ARRAY variables Differently from transmission receiving Function Blocks need setting with names and structures also as distinguishable from each other For jie a receiving the received data is saved in RD area only if the received frame is ADe LENS identical with the registered frame when compared if several frames of an identical structure are defined the data is received via the receiving frame registered A foremost and the data will not be received via the frame registered behind Chapter 7 Communication function Consequently for registery received data be careful not to register the identical formatted data Table 7 3 shows how to use I O variables of RCV_MSG Function Block Table7 3 1 O variables specification of RCV MSG output Data type Function Block starts service at rising edge 0 to 1 If Function Block is in service alteration of 0 gt 1 can be ignored SLOT NO SINT Selects slot the number of Cnet I F module to be
168. h Mode change during operation is unavailable No mode change function in Frame Editor Communication between Cnet I F modules is incon venient as provided only with dedicated communication Slave function Frame definition and GMWIN program need to be com posed in user defined mode No communication driver of main other company s pro tocol Protocol is defined and composed by user with Frame Editor in user defined mode Only ASCII data can be input Specified as ARRAY if HEX input CPU change is required as Cnet O S uses internal ROM of built in CPU for Ver Up Mode change during operation 1 6 is available with On line mode added to module Mode change with Frame Editor Operating mode change is available by remote control via RS 232C channel Communication between Cnet I F modules is easy with master function added to dedicated mode Communication between Cnet I F modules is available using dedicated Function Block without frame definition A B DF1 server protocol driver built in Modbus ASCII RTU protocol driver built in Server HEX can be set in constant area Trans data is transmitted in not ASCII but HEX Flash memory is used by O S Other company s dedicated protocol can be used as downloaded to flash memory Mode is changeable by remote control only for RS 232C channel Slave operation is same as established dedicated mode operation lower Ver of Cnet I F modu
169. h to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see Appendix B Error Code Table 4 Example of use In case HAABBCC is written in variable name of AAARESW with data type of Array byte 0 2 in station No 1 Computer request format Station Command Number Variable Variable Number of Header Command No type of block length name elements H4141415245 H414142424 ASCII value H05 H3031 H57 77 H3136 H3031 H3037 5357 343 For PLC ACK response after execution of command ame Ex ISCI al wo son s o o o For PLC NAK response after execution of command N Ew ES 17 HA ane x Eror code ASCII value H3031 H57 77 H3136 Error code 4 ie 7 68 Chapter 7 Communication function C1 Monitor registration X Monitor can be registered separately up to 32 combinations with reading command of actual variables and has a function to monitor the applicable variable value through the number registered by monitor command after the registration The max number available for monitor registration depends on the version of Cnet I F module The max number and registration variable number can be set via Frame Editor 1 Selection of the monitor registration number of Frame Editor Setting screen of basic parameters in Frame Editor has a function to set the siz
170. h RS 232C RS 422 0 User defined communication User defined communication Interlocking modenoeui User defined communication G3L CUEA 4 Userdefined communication Dedicated communication G4L CUEA Dedicated communication User defined communication GMWIN___ _Userdefined communication G6L CUEB O User defined communication E G6L CUEC E On line mode Set by Frame Editor G7L CUEB er N A User defined communication Set by GMWIN G7L CUEC Remark Note 1 In interlocking mode RS 232C and RS 422 channels are operated via identical protocol Note 2 In stand alone mode RS 232C and RS 422 channels are operated via different protocols respectively 7 1 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 1 2 User defined operation Figure7 1 describes operation procedure for user defined communication User defined communication shall be set according to the sequence below because configuration of Frame Editor and GMWIN program Is required 1 Sequence of user defined programming Figure7 1 Setting sequence of user defined program Set Cnet user mode with mode switch Edit protocol via Frame Editor Note Write frame and basic parameter via Cnet Compose PLC program via GMWIN TX RX Function Block Download PLC program and Switch to run mode Start normal communication i Remark Note 1 Analysis of operation method of protocol to communicate with shall be made ahead for user defined communication Please be
171. hall be set identical between master slave sides Chapter 8 Exercising program scutes Communication speed 9600 BPS Identical to Cnet I F module omeo froen 3 Setting of basic parameters Mode and basic parameters need setting for TM master slave communication Table 8 2 describes setting items for this For dedicated modem communication apply setting to RS 232C channel Table 8 2 Setting items Module name G4L CUEA l channelmode Standalonemode Standalonemode Operation modeto 3 dedicated mode erz 3 dedicatedmode RS 232C RS 232C communication type Dedicated modem channel setting Po l only valid communication speed 9600 BPS DATA 8 bits START 1 bit STOP 1 bit Remark Note1 Cnet I F module in TM master side shall be of Ver 2 0 or later as is in dedicated master mode to communicate TM slave side as used in dedicated mode slave is available regardless of the version Next is setting screen of Frame Editor to be set as in Table 8 2 Chapter 8 Exercising program Cnet Frame Editor untitled frm Type Dedicated Modem init Command ATZ p 1 2 Jd JG J8 g Download setting values of Frame Editor via each RS 232C channel for basic setting 4 GMWIN programming If dedicated modem and Cnet I F module have been set GMWIN program shall be prepared in TM master station for master operation in dedicated communication For master function service in dedicated communication
172. has the following features Q AB Asynchronous Link Full Duplex protocol supported LY MODBUS ASCII RTU protocol supported Q Other company s communication driver can be used as downloaded in Frame Editor Q Other company s dedicated mode can be set in On line mode Q Operation available for RS 232C RS 422 in stand alone or interlocking mode Q Operation available always as a server however unavailable as a master LI PLC programming is unnecessary Q Extension available for protocols which will be added in future Q Access available to M area of direct variable area in PLC 7 112 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 4 2 Operating mode amp downloading of communication driver 1 Type of communication drivers Other company s dedicated mode can be set by mode change from On line mode of mode switch 9 via Frame Editor to other company s dedicated mode and can be operated via AB Asynchronous Link Full Duplexor MODBUS protocol by downloading of communication driver file to Cnet I F module Communication driver file as an OS file to perform operation of specified protocol among other company s dedicated modes is to download just one Cnet I F module for the service Communication driver is saved in Cnet I F module s builtin flash memory as kept even if powered OFF Communication drivers are classified as specified in Table 7 26 according to protocol type and Cnet I F module type with extension name of LIB Table 7 2
173. he same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Ifframe No is not HFFFF after receiving the frame the nextframe shall be sent within 1 sec 7 85 Chapter 7 Communication function 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response Frame No Number of Station Command Error code Header No Command WE HEX 4 data HEX 2 Bytes yP Bytes HEX 1 Byte y Frame check Frame NAK H01 P p DX H0001 H1132 ETX BCC EX ASCII H15 H3031 H50 70 H4458 H30303031 H3130 H31313332 H03 value v Station number commands type of command frame No and number of data are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see Appendix B Error Code Table v Ifthis response Is received re start is required from the first with start command 4 Example of use In case frame NO is 255 and the number of data is H17 in station No 1 Computer request format tion mman Number Frame Header mm Command ae ang Frame No umae Tail of data check rae E e e woorr Hr moss aora
174. he sent data monitored from the beginning Check error code and perform P Any error in communication module troubleshooting Let communication command amp Are communication command amp frame definition set correct frame definition set correct Check cable if connected securely or No error in cable connection ot See user s manual of CPU to remove Any serious error in CPU CPU error Check error code and perform P Any error in communication module troubleshooting Close monitor screen amp frame editor screen and then execute TX monitor screen again 11 8 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 11 2 5 Error code ERR 8 ERR 9 Error on dedicated communication Dedicated communication RX error No response from other Station at all Check cable if connected securely or not No error in cable connection Let station No agreed through frame editor Is station No correct in protocol area Check error code and perform troubleshooting Any error in communication module Contact Service station 11 9 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Is the applied protocol agreed with dedicated protocol spec Is communication parameter agreed Any error in cable connection Check cable if connected securely or not 11 10 Let the protocol applied as agreed with dedicated protocol spec Let the parameter agreed th
175. hen execute again Delete PI and then execute again Check if Domain deleted or not Execute again after checking domain name Execute again from beginning afte adjusting frame number Execute again down upload afte executing initialization command Execute again after registering monitor Execute again after adjusting monitor registration number to 31 o less Execute again after adjusting monitor registration number to 31 o less Check and take actions for erro contents that may occur Appendix A 2 3 Error code for dedicated master communication As for the station operated in dedicated master communication mode and required to compose master program using GM_RD GM_WR function block error information is indicated by output error code on status output of the function block if error resulted by execution of function block occurs The following table is for error codes for the function block of dedicated communication Error code is displayed in a decimal unit STATUS value acion to take 1 Check setting of correspondent station No 2 Check dedicated mode for operation of correspondent No response from correspondent station l staton 3 Check communication basic parameter Position of Cnet I F module is incorrectly Check if SLOT _NO value is correct specified 1 Check operation mode of local Cnet module No response from Cnet I F module 2 Check channel No NAK from correspondent station has been Che
176. hen horizontal position is in the specified allowance from other station s optical modem communication is available in accordance with the communication characteristics of optical modem Thus communication is not allowed during vertical movement while allowed during horizontal movement in the horizontal allowance as not changed from the fixed optical modem Along with this method information about mobile body s location and vehicles and commands for loading unloading vehicles can be transferred from monitoring device to mobile bodies Monitoring device communicates in station 1 with station 3 via RS 422 communication with dedicated communication master functions available Chapter 8 Exercising program 8 2 1 Exercising program RS 422 channel of 1 3 stations responds to reading writing request of monitoring device through dedicated mode Slave thus communication programming is not required for RS 422 channel in GLOFA PLC However user defined program shall be prepared in user mode for RS 232C channel which operates as a master station to communicate with the module on mobile body Because the module on mobile body operates as a dedicated mode slave communication programming isn t necessary In system as in Figure 8 4 communication between monitoring device and module on mobile body is unavailable thus memory of PLC 1 3 stations shall be shared to change data with station 4 and monitoring device Table 8 3 describes communication with
177. iable Variable Header Command bypelNote of ee ven data yP blocks J frame E OUTPU ENQ H0002 H4F555 H3030324 H3130 H57 7 H3032 H3031 H3038 450555 45F31 1 r can be repeated up to max 4 blocks B For data type of array for 1 block only Numb Command Number of Variable Variable ae Header Command of typelNote blocks length name elements NG a ie ae e ii OUTPUT ni H11223344556 AMEER 6778899AA H3131323233 H4F5554 ASCII 33343435353 H05 H3130 H3137 H3031 H3041 5055545 ai 63637373838 F415252 39394141 1 block for 1 block only Remark Note 1 Data type of variable to be written is specified in command type For the details see Table 7 13 and Table 7 14 7 66 Chapter 7 Communication function BCC When command is one of lower case w only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ENQ to EOT Is converted into ASCII and added to BCC v Number of blocks This specifies the number of the blocks composed of Directvariable name Direct variable in this request format This can be set up to 4 blocks Therefore the value of Number of blocks must be HOL ASCII value 3031 H04 ASCII value 3034 Variable length This indicates the number of variable name s characters registered in access variable of PLC which is allowable up to 16 characters This value is one of ASCII converted from HEX type and the range is from HO1 ASCIl value 3031 to H10 ASC
178. ialized normally initial LED status is as below LED status of modem initialized GAL CUEA RUN BPS RUN BPS TX BPS TX BPS RX BPS RX BPS ACK DATA ACK DATA NAK PARITY NAK PARITY RUN BPS always ON TX BPS once ON Notel RX BPS once ON Note MODEM STOP always ON ERR EVEN ODD ERR EVEN ODD MODEM STOP RS 485 STOP SYS RUN SYS ERR RS 232C RS 422 4 30 Chapter 4 Performance specification Remark Notel TX LED of module flashes in a cycle of 1 second until modem is completely initialized If modem is initialized normally TX LED and RX LED flash almost simultaneously indicating that normal response of modem to initializing request of modem is performed In this case TX RX LEDs are no more flashing 6 The case in which the initializing described in 9 is completed normally indicates that modem and Cnet I F module are normally standing by with the following LED status kept until communication starts via telephoning from the other PC or communication devices LED status in stand by mode GAL CUEA RUN BPS RUN BPS TX BPS TX BPS RX BPS RX BPS ACK DATA ACK DATA NAK PARITY NAK PARITY RUN BPS always ON MODEM STOP always ERR EVEN ODD ERR EVEN ODD MODEM STOP RS 485 STOP SYS RUN SYS ERR RS 232C RS 422 7 After modem is initialized normally modem and Cnet I F module in stand by status wait for RING signal until received from the other mod
179. icated mode Is to be operated as a slave only like dedicated mode it just responds to request of master station 7 116 Chapter 7 Communication function H Other company s communication mode can perform communication via M direct variable area of GLOFA PLC Since address MAPPING used in service depends on type of communication driver please refer to protocol communication spec for that 7 4 3 Specifications of A B communication driver It is communication specifications for communication via AB Asynchronous Link Full Duplex protocol through GLOFA PLC of Cnet Ver 2 0 set to other company s dedicated mode for the service Q Operation of AB Asynchronous Link protocol is available only in Cnet I F module Ver 2 0 or later Q Cnet I F module operates as a server only so client operation is unavailable Q Cnet I F module supports AB Asynchronous Link Full Duplex protocol Q Cnet I F module uses AB PLC 5 commands set Q AB 34 lib AB6 lib files shall be downloaded to Cnet I F module for AB protocol operation Q Operation mode of Cnet I F module is to be set to other company s dedicated mode in On line mode Q Basic parameters such as communication speed station No etc shall be set as agreed with the communication specification of MMI devices via Frame Editor Q Separate operation for each RS 232C RS422 channel is available 1 Basic specification Q AB Asynchronous Link Full Duplex DF 1 protocol supported Server only suppor
180. iefacng win couteuc J nse C m on aunguasnisonvansa2 Fosh En communicat C ae ondvingrcsieveasazz Fesh fin communication ack on utngack retsmissonot ater na tanaman OOOO hak on inna varsmissonaterAcK tarmes asas on ourngns aes setngonaurngas azs OOO O SYS ERROR Flash during serious error occurrence PUURLP ccr Sd On during setting channel to RS 422 l5 B 6 Ea EE E S EJ Remark Note1 It flashes if system H W error or serious S W error occurs and the error status is indicated with upper 5 Bit LED 0 4 For the details see A 1 3 LED indication specification during abnormal operation A 1 Appendix Table A 2 GOL CUEB G6L CUEC LED No Name Normal LED status Flash Write Mode Flash per cycle of 1sec ae On during transmission via RS 232C Flash if in communication EA Ea Ea 1 1 2 3 4 J On during RS 232C channel operation R Flash in Flash Memory Write Mode On during ACK transmission Off afer NAK transmission On during NAK transmission Off afer ACK transmission Flash ifin error MODEM On during seting modem communication mode UN TX RX ACK NAK SYS RUN On dimly during interfacing with CPU of PLC en Flash if H W in errortNotel JERR Flash per cycle of 1sec if serious error occurs On during setting channel to RS 422 Flash Write Mode RUN Flash in Flash Memory Write Mode Flash per cycle of 1sec On during transmission via RS 422
181. ification Station No Frame w Eor BCC calculation range Next is for communication frame contents Refer to the user s manual of MASTER K 1000H for more information Q Station No Station No 5 station No of MASTERK 1000H Q Command w BCC checked in WORD WRITE with the lower case of command Q Address P00 P area of MASTER K 1000H Q Number 0A number of HEX data to write in word unit Q Data Data to write in specified device Q BCC ASCII code sum of HEX data from station No to tail 3 Frame edit Define 2 frames above through Frame Editor A Write request frame Write request frame as of TX frame is configured to send data via segment in ARRAY type to defined protocol Next is Frame Editor screen of transmission frame edited MK_WR is used for frame name and the number of TX data is set to 20 bytes with station No and constant command in CONST input to segment 1 and ARRAY variable to segment 2 ARRAY type is set to Convert to convert TX data to ASCII As is TX frame set TX RX to Send Chapter 8 Exercising program The a Main Flame te Ge ed Frame Name MK_WR TxfAix send g Header TENG Type CONST o5wPoo00A Type NONE ES Type ARRAY sc Type NONE f Convert C Hone S172 20 Type NONE Type NONE bs Ls Segment4 SR AEAEE E ES I Segment 8 Type MONE gt Type HONE E Cancel Tai IEOTJECC BCC Setting B Response frame To respond
182. igure 8 11 shows an example of system configuration through dial up modem and telephone line Figure 8 11 GMWIN connection via dial up modem GLOFA PLC a 20r Dial up Modem repeater station Dial up Modem 8 3 1 Exercising program For GMWIN connection via dial up modem set operation mode of this module to GMWIN mode and dial up modem connection mode and connect modem with Cnet I F module through modem setting and RS 232C cable 1 Operation setting For dial up modem connection with Cnet I F module set basic parameters as specified in Table 8 5 Table 8 5 Setting items e e S Senate eS A S RS 232C station No Station 0 Setting available only in Ver 2 0 RS 232C communication type Dial up modem a Modem initializing command Set initial value as in the user s manual Basic value ATZ 38400 BPS DATA 8 bits As agreed with the speed of dial START 1 bit STOP 1 bit up modem RS 232C communication speed Chapter 8 Exercising program 2 Operation setting Connect 9 pin to 25 pin cable with dial up modem and Cnet I F module via RS 232C channel in the following type Table 8 6 Modem connection with Cnet I F module 3 Modem initializing If mode setting and connection between modem and Cnet I F module via cable are completed link phone line to modem and let PLC powered on to initialize modem Modem initializing is accomplished by modem initializing command set previously in Cnet I F module after pow
183. ilable to be transmitted and received Check Rule As of menu to set BCC calculation type it can specify calculation types of Default Sum Multiplication or Exclusive OR and range Regardless of calculation types calculation is performed based on ASCII code values if the frame is of ASCII and based on frame HEX values if the frame is of HEX Example of BCC calculation according to BCC calculation type set is described below with ASCII communication volo fofri s elo o o ltor frame wo wy sm Chapter 5 Frame Editor DEFAULT Insert lower 1 byte of the HEX decimal summing results of data from 24 to BCC except the 1st date into BCC area Summing area is fixed H 1 BCC 1 Calculation Ex In exercising frame add ASCII codes in calculation range of H 1 T 0 in HEX 05 30 30 52 53 42 32 30 30 04 1E2 Use only lower byte in result 1E2 for BCC BCC value HEX E2 ASCII 4532 User can set summing area in BCC range area The other sections are the same as Default Ex Set H 0 T 0 in the range if BCC range is to be from the 1st data of header to tail Calculation Ex In exercising frame add ASCII codes in calculation range of H 0 T 0 in HEX 02 05 30 30 52 53 42 32 30 30 04 1E4 Use only lower byte in result 1E4 for BCC BCC value HEX E4 ASCII 4534 Function for data mask of BCC calculation results in SUM 1 is added Masks are classified into amp AND OR a
184. ine Q and then specify again Communication Enable Setting from menu Online Q Connect On ena ct bes beatae na Odino Star Unline Edita fot Online Edit Cancel Online Edt o eene a 7 110 Chapter 7 Communication function 4 Operation status related flag A TX RX error count per station No Total 32stations Q Flag name MRS ERR CNT n n 0 31 Q Data type Array byte Q Contents Number of errors is renewed per station No In other words the number of TX RX errors to station 0 is renewed in MRS ERR CNT 0 and the number of TX RX errors to station 31 is renewed in MRS ERR CNT 31 B Total 32 stations Contents of TX RX error Q Flag name MRS _ERR n n 0 31 Q Data type Array byte Q Contents Error code 1 Exceeded response time error to TX RX Error code 2 Error for NAK C Total 32 stations Mode and error contents of slave PLC Q Flag name SRS STATE n n 0 31 Q Data type Array byte Q Contents 0 Bit Error status of PLC set to slave error 1 normal 0 1 3 Bits Reserved 4 7 Bits Operation mode of PLC set to slave 4 Bits STOP 5 Bits RUN 6 Bits PAUSE 7 Bits DEBUG D Status flag of master PLC side Q Flag name MRS STATE25 Q Data type Array byte Q Contents 2 Bits M area exceeded in communication parameter setting E Max amp Min amp Current cycles of TX RX of parameter setting Q Flag name Time Type MRS SCAN MAX Time Type MRS SCA
185. ined 18 Not defined 19 Not defined 110 Not defined 411 Not defined 112 Not defined 113 Not defined 114 Not defined 415 Not defined H Double click on the following frame list 1 and activate Frame 1 window to set as in the figure below oo RCV_FRAME 1 _ J Byte t j t C C Item Setting value STX TXRX Type CONST Field RCV FRAME ASCII input selection button Type ARRAY Field MB10 Size 4 bytes ETX Chapter 8 Exercising program After frame setting click on OK button in Frame 1 window to register the frame as in the figure below fe 1 Send Bese Hee 1 Not defined 43 Not defined 44 Not defined 15 Not defined 16 Not defined 7 Not defined 18 Not defined 19 Not defined 10 Mot defined j 11 Mot defined 142 Not defined 413 Not defined 114 Not defined 415 Not defined J Click on OK button to go to communication parameter setting and then click on OK button again to complete setting K Prepare program as in the figure and let it downloaded to GM7 basic unit of slave station Refer to user s manual of GMWIN for the details of programming and downloading Inthe program Function Block is used Prior to Function Block service double click on the item of GMWIN Included libraries to open Include Library window as below Click on Add A button to add COMM 7FB library and then press OK button niclode Lihrary nehle Library Chapter 8 Exercising progra
186. ing 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Ifframe No is not HFFFF after receiving this frame the upload command shall be sent within 1 sec 7 92 Chapter 7 Communication function 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response iene Station eee Command Frame No Error code Tail Frame type HEX 2 Bytes HEX 2 Bytes check N No prame Ex T ooo 41132 ASCII value H3031 H50 70 H5558 H30303031 H31313332 wel ee v Station number commands type of command and frame No are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error v Ifthis response is received re start is required from the first with start command 4 Example of use In case frame No is 255 in station No 1 Computer request format ame Ex n ot ASCII value yoo Hoo _nssse aoao oa v Frame No is indicated in HEX value For PLC ACK response after execution of command In case the number of data is H17 ti N rogram Fram PER Station ee Command Sera umber Sequence progra Tail ame No type of data data check vi ux Hooe 108540 Frame Ex ASCII value H3031 H50 70 H5558 H30304646 H3137 H31303535 34304641 sit
187. ion number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error 7 83 Chapter 7 Communication function 4 Example of use In case Domain name is setto PLC_pgmand FILE SIZE of BNO0 is 123456 Bytes Computer request format F Frame P p ui PLC i ee 00123456 EOT PN ERREN H50 70 H444E H3037 H504C435F52570676D H3030313233343536 w For PLC ACK response after execution of command mmea ack n eo ascivane no no somo we w For PLC NAK response after execution of command A al H ASCII value H a eaf m f omn em om ferron vans Hooo Haa erorcodey m o v Surely perform download command within 1 sec after receiving PLC ACK response as a result of the execution of this command service or startcommand will be invalid Consequently startcommand shall be executed again to download again 7 84 Chapter 7 Communication function C1 Program download start command PDN PDD This downloads the program data after receiving ACK response as a result of execution of program download start command This service must be performed within 1 sec after response of program download startcomma
188. ion of command Station ae Command Number Number Number Tall Frame type of blocks of data of data check H3041 H52 72 H3032 H3032 H3032 H31323334 H3032 H41333032 H03 For PLC NAK response after execution of command tati mman eader aoe Command omman Error code No type eader L oO gt Frame Ex A ASCII value TE TE z 1 H Frame Ex NA Error code 2 BCC ASCII value H15 H3041 H52 72 H3032 Error code 4 7 55 Chapter 7 Communication function Cl Reading of PLC STATUS RST This is a function to read flag list such as operation status and error information of PLC 1 Request format PC gt PLC areal ASCII H3041 H52 72 H5354 value v BCC When command is one of lower case r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ENQ to EOT is converted into ASCII and added to BCC 2 Response format for PLC of ACK response Station STATUS data t Tail Frame E x ETX ACK HOA R r ST STATUS data format BCC ASCII H03 H06 H3041 H52 72 H5354 X value v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v STATUS data format This status format is converted into ASCII code of total 20 byt
189. ion speed data stop bit etc as in transmission type set in dedicated modem Cnet Frame Editor untitled frm Dedicated Modem init Command Hull Modem Dial Up Modem Dedicated Modem 4 22 Chapter 4 Performance specification 3 Set communication type to dedicated modem in basic parameter setting in Figure above Basic value is set to null modem 4 Write basic parameters and change communication in Online connection of Frame Editor to switch RS 232C channel over to communication run 5 If switched to communication run operation setting of Cnet I F module is completed and the setting contents are saved in flash memory of the module as reserved even if powered off 4 4 1 5 Troubleshooting for dedicated modem If basic setting of Cnet I F module and dedicated modem is completed connect Cnet I F module with dedicated modem using modem connection cable and start normal communication with power on At this moment communication can be checked if normal or not through LED display of Cnet I F module and dedicated modem Only LED of RS 232C channel in Cnet I F module is related with modem operation In dedicated modem user s manual for dedicated modem Shall be referred to according to makers due to different specification of LED display 4 23 Chapter 4 Performance specification 1 Module s LED status before communication starts G4L CUEA RUN BPS TX BPS RX BPS ACK DATA NAK PARITY ERR EVEN ODD MODEM S
190. is how to change online mode of Cnet I F module in the structure of Figure5 13 1 Select No 9 mode switch of Cnet I F module continuously with power on and perform online connection via Frame Editor 2 Select change items of online mode in online menu to enter mode change menu Online Change Mode 3 Setslot No 0 where Cnet I F module is mounted and connection stage to local in online mode change box 4 Select desired type of channel operation from channels of interlocking and stand alone Note Remark Note1 Setting values are valid only in RS 232C channel for G6L CUEB and only in RS 422 channel for G6L CUEC In case of two types of modules the operation isn t available in interlocking mode Basic value if not set is user mode all for RS 232C RS 422 in stand alone channel 5 If mode is set as required select Write button to change modes If modes are changed the following message will be displayed to indicate operation mode completed 5 36 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Remark Note1 If mode change Is written communication of RS 232C RS 422 channel is disconnected for approx 1 second to convert operation into newly changed mode and then is automatically operated in changed mode after mode change Is completed 6 If the message below is shown the mode switch of Cnet I F module is not No 9 online mode Change mode Switch of Cnet I F module to No 9 online mode reset PLC and execute again from No 1
191. ising program Consequently If 8 LEDs of master station are turned on 8 LEDs of slave station are turned off And if 8 LEDs of master station are turned off again 8 LEDs of slave station are turned on Surely set both master slave stations to Communication Enable to start communication Chapter 9 Diagnosis function Chapter 9 Diagnosis function 9 1 Loop Back self diagnosis Loop Back self diagnosis is a checking function if this module operates normally by itself as not connected with external devices via communication cable Through this function self diagnosis is available for all hardware of Cnet I F module except for external communication line and RS 232C RS 422 channels also can be tested simultaneously For Loop Back self diagnosis set operation mode switch of the module to test mode Remark Notel GM7 G7L CUEB G7L CUEC series isn t provided with the diagnosis function 9 1 1 Principle of operation Loop Back test sends test data from computer link itself without external cable connection to RS 232C RS 422 channels and receives the data to display the diagnosis result on LED as compared with the sent data Figure 9 1 shows data flow in Loop Back mode Figure 9 1 Data flow chart in Loop Back mode ne RS 232C Channel RX A RS 232C Cable ji PLC CPU RX ie Chapter 9 Diagnosis function 9 1 2 Procedure of Loop Back self diagnosis Procedure of Loop Back self diagnosis is as f
192. l devices Figure4 11 shows an example of system structure using dial up modem and public line Figure4 11 System structure of dial up modem communication Imaginary connection RS 232C Cable tertsett 115m 112e RS 232C CABLE Dial up modem Dial up modem Aerial circuit Aerial circuit Relay station 4 4 2 1 Dial up modem selection In communication with modem line may not be connected depending on performance of modem and status of public line and line connection may be released while exchanging data even after once connected due to great influences on quality of data communication caused by quality of public line status of relay station and performance of dial up modem Therefore selection of such a reliable modem as specified and recommended in the table below is most important Communication speed More than 14400 BPS Flow control CTS RTS Flow Control Command Hayes complied AT Command supported Error correction Error correction function in data transmission Carrier wave control Control function of carrier wave transmission 4 27 Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 4 2 2 How to connect the modem with this module Dial up modem and Cnet I F module are connected with 9 pin cable via RS 232C channel as wired as below Mode side 25 P IN Remark Note1 Dial up modem if purchased is usually provided with DTE connection cable built in as an accessory however this cable for connection between PC
193. l status to allow remote connection again via telephoning 2 Dedicated modem connection Figure 7 24 shows dedicated modem connection between PC and Cnet I F module via dedicated line where Cnet I F module can be set to dedicated modem without telephoning stage differently from dial up modem Figure 7 24 Connection diagram via dedicated modem Cnet al essossssosssosecososeoocosessosoosooo y Bl ECET E EPPP ee on s nunni a sunna nnn nun nun T O nn a un eo Dedicated line Modem Figure 7 24 shows an example of dedicated modem connection via dedicated line or wireless modem optical modem available also Modem without public line shall be set as in dedicated modem as follows Refer to 4 4 How to connect to modem in this manual for selection of dedicated modem connected with Cnet I F module and connection setting of dedicated modem of Cnet I F module Remote connection sequence via dedicated modem is as follows A Connect dedicated modem between PC and Cnet I F module B Set RS 232C channel of Cnet I F module to GMWIN mode C Set RS 232C channel operation of Cnet I F module to dedicated modem D Run GMWIN program and select connection from project option to specify connection type Set connection type to modem and dedicated modem and communication port and transmission speed which are set in dedicated modem linked with PC Communication speed shall be set same as in dedicated modem 7 129 Chapter
194. le can be used Service is available by downloading communication library in frame editor Zero 00 code can t be input Ver Up easy and additional functions of other company s driver under consi deration Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 3 Established functions Ver 2 0 has been designed in 100 of compliance with the established versions and hardware configuration is the Same as the former versions of products as upgraded via software Ver Up without hardware change Accordingly mounting and communicating connection with PLC CPU user defined communication dedicated communication GMWIN connection modem communication function etc are available as same as in the established functions 1 2 4 Frame Editor Version 2 0 To make additional configuration of Cnet Ver 2 0 available Frame Editor also shall be of Ver 2 0 Since Frame Editor Ver 2 0 has been designed to keep compliance with the established program the service for the former versions of modules is allowed However the added functions in this user s manual are available only for Cnet Ver 2 0 Select Help in the upper menu of Frame Editor to check the version The screen below shows Frame Editor information of Ver 2 0 Cnet Frame Editor 1 2 5 Added function of Version2 0 This user s manual describes the additional functions via module Ver Up and the established functions of Cnet functions together The additional functions provided only in Cnet V
195. le 7 8 is composed of CONST only set it to CONST and input RD24 As itis ASCII transmission select ASCII Next is the input result of segment Note Remark Note 1 In immediate response frame ARRAY type of segment can t be used Input ETX to Tail as below As BCC is not applied no setting is needed Figure7 9 shows registration screen of the immediate response frame Immediate response frame as registered with an identical name of immediate response frame in receiving frame differently from other transmission frames needs no preparing of additional transmission program in GMWIN program Immediate response frame if frame set to RD_ DATA Is received searches for IMM RESPONSE frame set to immediate response frame and transmits the frame in specified format automatically in Cnet I F module 7 19 Chapter 7 Communication function RD24 da If preparing of TX RX frame is completed as above download frames and basic parameters to Cnet I F module and Switch RS 422 channel to Operation Run to finish preparation of Cnet I F module operation To operate actual transmitting and receiving after frames are prepared a program shall be prepared in GMWIN and downloaded to PLC Next is how to prepare GMWIN program 7 20 Chapter 7 Communication function 4 Preparing of GMWIN program Frame prepared via Frame Editor creates transmission frame in Cnet and receives receiving frame as compared To
196. lf diagnosis ee EE TO ee ee 0 2 9 1 3 Operation of Loop Back testLED cocccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsccccsccccscesessssssscens 0 3 9 Diagnosis during power on ceececcocososoococoocococoocoecocoococoococococcococoocococcocosocooecocoocococoococosoooo 0 6 Chapter 10 installation and Testing operation ceccccooooooooooooooooocccccccocooococooooooooooooococooooooo 10 1 10 9 10 1 Installation and testing operation Tire CT eee ee Cee te Ce Tere eT eee ee eee eee ee ee 10 1 10 1 1 Mounting and installation cecrer errr scree eter eee e eee e eee e eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeecssesssseeesecessesesseseees 10 2 10 1 2 Cautions during system INStallationcsscccrrsscccccccccsesssccceecccccscececcceccsssssseesccsssssseeees 10 4 10 1 3 Testing operation ee RE CO CE Oe Ce RR ee ee 10 6 10 2 Maintenance and CHECK eseseeesseeeessseesessoeossososoososossosossososossosossososossosossosossososoeeos 10 8 10 2 1 Daily CHECK cccccccccccccccccscccccccccececccccccccsssssseesenseseeccssssssssssssessesesseccccsssessseees 10 8 10 2 2 Regular check SOUT EEE CELE TEETER Te ET ET Cee ee eee eee eee 10 9 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting CeCe emcee errr reer eee reese eee ee eee ee esse eres eee ee see seers eseseseseseseeese 11 1 11 11 11 1 Abnormal operations CRE CT CT ET ee EEEE EAEE EER EEEEEEEEEEE REELE EEEREIE 11 1 11 2 Troubleshooting by each error COdRcrercrscccrrssc esses steer este eeee essere esse ecseceeecescescscceees 11 3 11 2 1 Error code ERR 1 ERR 2 hardware amp system
197. library is used 2 Wrong response frame Is received H14 Response from Cnet I F module isn treceived waiting time exceeded Operation of RS 232C 422 channel is not run 7 10 Chapter 7 Communication function a a Description ae lee names eene O in Frame Editor and in Function Block do not fit each other Frame name can not be found due to abnormal CPU during operation during transmission Frame specified in FNAM has not been received from the other station aak oai Frame has not been downloaded from Frame Editor onas do Error occurs during conversion ASCII e HEX or i Array size specified in Frame Editor and data size specified in LENx used in Function Block 4 7 do not fit each other Heg 100 Aray type specifed n SDxorRDx is inconet wer 103 incomectfame defntton Incorrect frame definition aa e ieee 33 115 operation made is notuser dened communication mode 7 11 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 1 4 Example of user defined programming Figure 7 5 shows the example of communication system and frame structure between GLOFA PLC and other company s PLC With the example in Figure7 5 programming method of user defined communication will be described The example is for the case when writing 18 byte data of MBO area in GLOFA PLC via other company s PLC and reading 24 byte data of other company s PLC to save to area address of MB100 in GLOFA PLC Figure 7 5 Example of
198. list Q Select master in dedicated item of protocol and tansmission mode in communication parameter to activate entry list button v Total 64 data blocks can be set without setting of block No v __TX RX data size can be set up to 60 WORDs without TX RX period Q Area setting v Transmission Area to read I Q M Saving area Q M v Receiving Area to read I Q M Saving area Q M 7 108 Chapter 7 Communication function Q The screen below shows altered items of private 1 Private 1 em Edit x v Other s station No Set slave other station station No v Mode Let Send checked to write data in slave station Let Receive checked to read data from slave station v Size Unit is WORD with max 60 WORDS available for the definition of data size to read write in master station v Area Area to Area in master station where Area in slave station to read To select MW0 read data to write is saved Select MW and input 0 in the next blank space Saving Area in slave station to write Area in master station where To select QWO 1 0 area data read is saved Select QW and input 0 1 0 in the next blank space 7 109 Chapter 7 Communication function 3 Setting of Communication Enable For dedicated communication master after communication parameter setting and programming connect surely GM7 basic unit which is set to master station with GMWIN to execute Connect from menu Onl
199. m f Frame 0 of RX frame is received the value is saved in MBO of slave station Refer to frame setting of Frame 0 The saved value of MBO at this time is output to direct variable QB0 0 0 and value output to direct variable QB0 0 0 is saved again to MB10 If all the procedure is completed without error Frame 1 in frame list is sent from Function Block Frame 1 is the TX frame of 4 bytes data saved in MB10 GM IN tor Windows c Wgmwing JeWsource Wuser_slave prj E LD 1 PROGRAM INSTH ciHymwin3 JeH sourcetliser_s lave E COMMENTS for DIRECT VARIABLES gt B variables declared PARAMETERS f Frame 0 of RX frame is not received this program operates never Surely set both master slave stations to Communication Enable to start communication 2 Communication parameter setting and program of master station A Perform operations in master station No 0 B Create new project file and new program for master station Chapter 8 Exercising program rceWuser_master pri PLO Type GH CONFIGURATIONCPLO gt Configuration Name UNNAMED BE ACCESS VARIABLES H variables declared Mame RESO B RESOURCE GLOBALS variables declared E TASK DEFINITIONS 1 tasks defined C Select communication parameter in GMWIN parameters and double click on it to open communication parameter menu window 8 60 Chapter 8 Exercising program Setparameters as below and click on OK button C
200. m connection has two types of dedicated modem connection via dedicated line and dial up modem connection via public line 1 Dial up modem connection Figure 7 23 shows an example of dial up modem connection Dial up modem connection is to connect dial up modem with PC and Cnet I F module via telephoning for remote connection through added function services to start stop phone call Namely make a phone call first in GMWIN to apply remote connection after phone is connected via PC linked modem of external or internal dial up type and via external modem for Cnet side Refer to 4 4 How to connect to modem in this manual for selection of dial up modem connected with module and connection initial setting of dial up modem of Cnet I F module 7 125 Chapter 7 Communication function Figure 7 23 Example of GMWIN remote connection via dial up modem Cnet a l l l JI a gt 3 Cm O O mD D ap O cr O mD 9455 3 R205 CE L E ETET RS 232C cable RS 232C cable PSTN Dial up Modem Dial up Modem REPEATER station Remote connection sequence via dial up modem is as follows A Set operation mode of RS 232C channel in Cnet I F module to GMWIN mode B Set RS 232C channel operation of Cnet I F module to dial up modem and input modem initializing command Run GMWIN program and select connection from project option to specify connection type L cow eC 0417 550 8379 Set conne
201. mat for PLC of ACK response Station Comman Number Number Frame Header Command Tail No d type of blocks of data check Frame E H112233445566778899AA ET ACK H10 R r SB 01 H14 BCC xX BBCCDDEEFF1122334455 X H3131323233333434353536363 ASCII H52 737383839394141424243434444 H06 H3130 H5342 H3031 H3134 H03 value 72 454546463131323233333434353 5 v Station number main commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format vY For continuous reading response insert HO1to Number of blocks to transmit BCC When command Is one of lower case r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Number of data means Byte number of HEX type and is converted into ASCII This number is determined by multiplying the data number of computer request format by the data size in below table according to memory type X B W D L included in directvariable name of computer request format Namely the result from multiplying the data type and the request length together is to be the data length of response frame as in a unit of byte differently from the data length of reading request frame Data length of request frame H05 Double Word Data length of response frame 05 X 4 20 H14 in HEX Table7 18 Direct variable available Data type Direct variable available Data size Byte umeopwie E Byte B MB QB IB WORD W MW
202. me Editor Even if there is no data to be transmitted in other words no segment set to ARRAY in Frame Editor SD values shall be input as input value is not set compile error is expected output ata type Be turned On after Function Block service is finished without error and keeps On until the NDR BOOL next Function Block is called Chapter 7 Communication function output bata type Turned On when the Function Block is called but not executed successfully and keeps ERR BOOL On until re called If error occurs error information is displayed on output STATUS If ERR is 1 as the result of execution of Function Block error code is output by identification code for the error If ERR is vanished STATUS is also vanished to 0 STATUS USINT l l For details of error codes refer to Table 7 4 Error codes in user defined Function Block Remark Note 1 If Udata SEND is used for FNAM specifying frame name in SND_MSG Function Block the data specified in D1 SD2 5D3 SD4 only are transmitted directly irrelevant to the frame list downloaded to Cnet I F module This function is used to transmit all the frames to be sent as written in PLC program especially to transmit frames prepared in PLC program for the protocol which is hard to write via Frame Editor If Udata SEND is used no procedure to write and download frame via Frame Editor is required 2 Receiving Function Block RCV_MSG Send Message Figure on the ri
203. memory area and all areas of MODBUS are mapped to M area As for data type as agreed with function code of MODBUS Protocol bit command is mapped to MX area and word command is to MW area however access to different area is not allowed If bit of MODBUS is read namely if Read Coil Status amp Read Input Status are read start address shall be started in a multiple of 8 Ex 00008 10008 00016 10048 It is because communication module of GLOFA PLC dose not allow continuous reading of BIT address to direct variable Continuous reading command of bit in MODBUS is processed as changed into reading command of byte block 7 123 Chapter 7 Communication function Table 7 32 describes data memory mapping between MODBUS and GLOFA Cnet Table 7 32 MODBUS communication driver supported function code address mapping Remark Note 1 Figures in of each item are reference values of MODICON Controller Note 2 For reading of Coil Status amp Input Status the address shall be set in a multiple of 8 Ex 8 16 32 8000 gt OK 3 5 27 9991 gt ERROR Note 3 All addresses of MODICON Controller are mapped in MX MW areas of GLOFA PLC causing repeated area pay attention to setting Ex Read Holding Reg 100 gt MW100 Read Input Reg 100 gt MW100 same area Note 4 Since start address of MODICON Controller is 1 access to GLOFA PLC 0 address is unavailable however access to addresses stari
204. module s TX LED doesn t flash follow LED Checklist to TXD Flash RXD 3 Check public line 1 If TXD LED doesnt flash either follow the action for TXD LED Flash if in T EEIN RTS transmission Aa 2 Check cable connection between module and modem En ER ER troubleshoot 2 If module s TX LED flashes check cable connection between Cnet and modem 1 Check if phone line is connected to line terminal 1 Check if RTS LED flashes CTS will flash only if RTS flashes 2 Shoot the trouble of RTS LED to let RTS flash Flash if in transmission ON always ON always 2 Check cable connection between module and modem ON after r 1 Check status of public line telephoned 2 Check connection status of phone line to line terminal 3 Check cable connection between module and modem 1 Check if module is set to modem mode 2 Check cable connection between module and modem 1 Check if module is set to modem mode OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FF 4 33 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Chapter 5 Frame Editor 5 1 Basic functions Frame Editor is a WINDOWS application to set basic operation mode of Cnet I F module and to operate Run Stop frame download etc Frame Editor is also upgraded to Ver 2 0 to fit the functions of module Ver 2 0 and is developed to be in 100 compliance with former versions of Frame Editors along with additional functions to support supplemented features of Cnet Ver 2 0 Updated version of Frame Editor can be used throu
205. monitoring device and data TX RX map between Cnet I F modules for this Table 8 3 Data TX RX map TX RX map with monitoring device TX RX map between Cnet I F modules Station No TX RX TX RX Length Length Length Length area area area area MBO 80bytes MB100 50bytes MB140 40bytes MBO 20bytes MBO 80bytes MB100 50bytes MB140 40bytes MBO 20bytes MBO 80bytes MB100 5Obytes MB140 40bytes MBO 20bytes Direct communication with monitoring device 2 Station 4 unavailable MBO 20bytes MB100 40bytes data change via Cnet 1 3 stations Figure 8 5 Data TX RX path Monitoring Device GM4 station 1 GM4 station 4 20BYTES MB0 MB19 8OBYTES MB0 MB79 50BYTES MB100 MB149 40BYTES MB140 MB179 Fixed body Mobile body Chapter 8 Exercising program Figure 8 5 describes TX RX data path according to data TX RX map in Table 8 3 with the example of Cnet stations 1 amp 4 and monitoring device Cnet stations 2 amp 3 are the same case as in communication via the identical path Direct communication between monitoring device and station 4 on mobile body is unavailable in the figure thus data will be changed through station 1 As shown in Figure 8 4 20 bytes from MBO of station 1 Is the saving area of data read from station 4 of mobile body and via this area monitoring device starts reading data of station 4 To the contrary when data is written from monitorin
206. n 3 How to set other company s communication mode A Release On line connection and let PLC powered off after library writing to Cnet I F module is completed B Change Cnet I F module s mode switch to No 9 On line mode and then let PLC powered on for On line connection C Select On line mode change from On line menu of menu bar to display the following screen for On line mode change where other company s dedicated mode for RS 232C or RS 422 channel is to be set and then channel operation and connection steps are to be exactly selected with Write button clicked on to complete mode change and to start operation in other company s dedicated mode if set to stand alone mode Other company s dedicated mode can be operated separately for RS 232C RS 422 channel with the individual operation available according to selected mode Online Change Mode x D In case that operation is switched to other company s dedicated mode if LED No 0 1 2 of Cnet I F module is On and LED No 15 No 7 in Gm6 Cnet flashes in a cycle of 1 sec library has not been downloaded to flash memory Check if communication driver is downloaded E In normal running set and write basic parameters such as station No communication speed etc F Now the operation in other company s dedicated mode is completed as ready to enable communication in other company s dedicated mode via cable connection with applicable channel G Because other company s ded
207. n MASTER K 1000H CPU as shown in Figure 8 15 Handshake free type of null modem connection in RS 232C communication is applied with MASTER K 1000H communication type set to RS 232C communication and 9600 BPS Data 8 bits Start 1 bit Stop 1 bit through DIP switch along with station No set to station 5 Refer to the user s manual for MASTER K series communication to set MASTER K 1000H communication Figure 8 15 3 line connection between Cnet and MASTER K 1000H Handshake free Cnet 9 pin r TEET E MASTER K1000 CPU onnection No and Signal direction CD RXD XD DTR SG TS TS o O D ore a po 3 2 20 4 5 2 3 TX RX sequence of communication frame TX RX procedure to communicate in MASTER K 1000H computer communication type is as follows Cnet I F module operates as a master station and MASTER K 1000H operates as a slave to respond to Cne s request as shown in the figure Figure 8 16 TX sequence of TX RX frames A Write request frame B Response frame G UODAIS NL S HOODY LSVN Chapter 8 Exercising program When GLOFA Cnet sends A Write request frame first MASTER K 1000H to respond to this writes data to applicable area and sends B Response frame Next is TX RX frame structure A Word Write frame Cnet s request Write request of 10 words in P00 of station 1 SC A a a Cae E l BCC calculation range P A E B Response format to Word Write Response of MASTER K 1000H Class
208. n No Name Description Cnet lt gt external devices D RDA RRXA Received data _ a 3 SDA TXA Transmitted data 4 spare Transmited data 9 sese h rr ine fr sina ps re c rund ine for rare Q Contents in of the name mean terminal specification of G7L CUEC Channel RS 422 is designed as available to connect RS 422 and RS 485 mult drop with external devices When RS 422 channel is used as multi drop set channel RS 422 to RS 485 communication in setting menu of RS 422 communication type of Frame Editor and use the terminals of RS 422 as connected as shown in Figure4 9 Figure4 8 shows an example of connecting communication cable in RS 422 communication Figure 4 8 RS 422 connection Computer link side Signal direction Cnet lt gt external devices oR s soa External communication device E d rrr sm UU R saso 1e sg F G os ne S e Chapter 4 Performance specification Figure 4 9 RS 485 connection compre link side Signal direction External communication Cnet lt gt external devices device SDA a T mem Fe 2 Tema a ia ll E F igure4 9 shows how to connect RS 485 multi drop communication In case of multi drop communication to connect with external devices RDA and SDA RDB and SDB ofRS 422 channel shall be connected each other At this time half duplex communication is run sharing Tx Rx line so RS 422 channel mode shall be applied as set to RS 485 in Fram
209. n between Cnets 7 3 1 Introduction Dedicated communication master provides Function Block service for communication between Cnet I F modules available only for Cnet Ver 2 0 or later Dedicated mode in the former Cnet I F modules than Ver 2 0 has only slave function thus for communication between GLOFA Cnets one Cnet I F module shall be set to user mode and the other shall be set to dedicated mode to define the frame in Frame Editor by setting the user mode station to master station and to additionally prepare program via SEND RCV Function Block in GMWIN program inconveniently However without user s additional protocol definition during the communication between GLOFA Cnets dedicated communication master function allows communication between Cnets using only Function Block for dedicated communication with master function added to dedicated mode and it has following characteristics Q Master function added to dedicated mode slave function Q Same mode switch in dedicated mode is used with Function Block added for master function Q No need to prepare frame via Frame Editor after setting the dedicated mode Communication is available by preparing program via dedicated communication Function Block in GMWIN Q Programming available for each RS 232C RS 422 channel Q Cnet I F module available for communication in dedicated mode slave can be used in a former module than Ver 2 0 Q Reading Writing of continuous data of max 110 bytes are allowed vi
210. n to basic unit Refer to user s manual of GM7 10 1 Chapter 10 Installation and Testing operation 10 1 1 Mounting and installation Figure 10 1 shows an example case that max 4 Cnet I F modules are mounted on GM4 CPU As shown in the figure Cnet I F module can be mounted on basic base only as nearest as possible to CPU for reliable communication As for GMR dual CPU however single extended base is mountable on Figure 10 1 Mounting on GM4 CPU O her g e r en r ry G ri r amp amp EN a rj e rj ra ra bn ia lnla ia Le md d d d d ed aia niania Len PETEA Installation sequence is as follows 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 Prepare basic system configuration required for system configuration Prior to installation work of this communication module let PLC keptas powered off Check for any foreign substance on the base connector where module is to be mounted on prior to installation of the communication module and verify if any connector pin of this module is bent or damaged Communication module except for dual CPU cannot be mounted on extended base but surely be mounted on basic base at the slot positioned nearest to CPU Max number of units mountable per CPU is 8 which shall be mounted as specified in Table 10 1 With communication cable not connected insert the protuberant at bottom of the module correctly into the groove of the base board and then
211. nd XEx OR Ex In case the mask is set to amp F0 with the setting range of H 0 T 0 by SUM 1 of BCC type Calculation Ex In exercising frame add ASCII codes in calculation range of H 0 T 0 in HEX 02 05 30 30 52 53 42 32 30 30 04 1E4 Use the result from AND calculation between lower byte E4 and F0 in result 1E4 for BCC BCC value HEX E0 ASCII 4530 9 15 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Use the result from Exclusive OR calculation of all data in setting area for BCC Range setting is same as in SUM 1 Ex In case the range is set to H 0 T 0 with BCC type of XOR 1 Calculation Ex In exercising frame perform XOR calculation of ASCII codes in calculation range of H 0 T 0 02 05 30 30 52 53 42 32 30 30 04 72 BCC value HEX 72 ASCII 3732 Function for data mask of BCC calculation results in XOR 1 is added Masks are classified into amp AND OR and XEx OR Ex In case the mask Is set to amp F0 with the setting range of H 0 T 0 by XOR 2 of BCC type Calculation Ex In exercising frame perform Ex OR calculation of ASCII codes in calculation range of H 0 T 0 02 05 30 30 52 53 42 32 30 30 04 72 Use the result from AND calculation between the result 72 and FO for BCC BCC HEX 70 ASCII 3730 Use the result from Multiplication calculation of all data in setting area for BCC Range setting is same as in SUM 1 Ex In
212. nd Also the delay time of each program download sequence service must be within 1 sec 1 Request Format PC gt PLC Station Comman Comman amen Number of Header 4 oe HEX 4 Bytes data data Tail i HEX 1Bytes P p OT ASCII value H3031 H50 70 H4458 H30303031 H3130 v Frame No indicates the current frame number 4 Bytes to be downloaded in the entire download sequence l No ame Ex eno Hor io ox moo mo fOO leor This number must be incremental in sequence until the download finishes completely Frame No increases in sequence from 0001 This indicates the number of data included in this frame It can include up to 120 Bytes Data shall be set as agreed with the max size 120 Bytes if possible For the last frame surely set frame No to HFFFF 46 46 46 46 AO SGN If the lastframe No isn tsetto HF FFF download execution is regarded as finished abnormally without download completed BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 2 Response Format When PLC response ACK pe Station Comman Comman Frame NO Number of data Tail Frame No d d type HEX 4 Bytes HEX 1 Byte check er rome ex ack wor e ox noon ASCII value 1303 aaas 43030303 wm e v Station number commands type of command frame No and number of data are t
213. nd and communication with the outside is disconnected however automatically it starts operation again after operation change is completed 5 4 2 Changing of remote operating mode Setting of remote operation mode is for changing the operation mode of Cnet I F module which is remote connected via RS 232C channel of local PLC Cnet I F module It is convenient for such remote communication via Cnet I F module and dedicated modem mainly between two PLCs as continued converted to desired operation mode again with program modification by GMWIN remote connection to remote PLC after changing Cnet operation mode to GMWIN mode Main features of changing remote operation mode are as follows Q Setting of operation mode for Cnet I F module of remote PLC is available Q Both local remote Cnet I F modules are available only in online mode Q Remote operation setting via RS 422 channel is unavailable Q Communication of Cnet I F module if its operation mode is being changed is disconnected for approx 1 second and then is run as started again in the changed mode after the operation change Q All local remote Cnet I F modules shall be of Ver 2 0 or later to allow operation change LY Communication mode in RS 232C channel of two Cnet I F modules shall be set identical 5 39 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Q As for remote operation change setting channel operation to interlocking channel is unavailable Q Operation mode of remote Cnet I F module can be r
214. nd received The number of data on the basis of ASCII code s length can be set up to 240 byte with total length of frame limited to 256 byte Table 5 3 describes setting items of frame body Table 5 3 Setting of data type setting item Data type Used if set figures are transmitted received as they are HEX figures only available l Used for Setting of the even number of data only o communication In availableiNote1 HEX figures CONST Data of 00 is unavailable INote2 Setting up to 30 byte available Used if set figures or ASCII codes in characters are l l Used for transmitted received ASCII l communication in Character setting available characters Setting up to 15 byte available l Communication SD area data of PLC program F B is converted into in figures only ASCII code when transmitted seat available ARRAY Data if received is sent to RD area of PLC program Convert ASCII data out Note3 F B as converted into HEX l l of HEX range HEX figures only available l is regarded as Setting up to 120 byte of data available an error Chapter 5 Frame Editor seting item Data type SD area data of PLC program F B is not converted into ASCII code when transmitted Communication Data if received is sent to RD area of PLC program l ARRAY available None F B as not converted into HEX Note3 ae In characters TX RX of data in figures and characters are and figures available Setting up t
215. net I F module flashes in a cycle of 1 second Refer to Chapter 4 Operation mode setting for details of flash writing mode setting of Cnet I F module 2 Run Frame Editor and select Open Lib in File to display the dialog box for opening library file Select the directory where driver is saved and then choose the applicable library file to confirm File description shows the contents and the version of the library file where the version of the library can be checked Open Lib File Lor ale a e ies al 3 n modbus 1 lib modbus 2 lib Library File e u TF ae eee Le IPE i i oy I ra y ah cer k bret h 5 31 Chapter 5 Frame Editor 3 Library files of AB DF 1 and MODBUS are provided via downloads per Cnet I F module respectively Library file names per Cnet I F module are described in Table 5 6 Table 5 6 Other company s driver file description File name Description AB34 LIB AB DF1 Driver for G3L CUEA G4L CUEA AB6 LIB AB DF1 Driver for G6L CUEB G6L CUEC MODBUS34 LIB Modbus Driver for G3L CUEA G4L CUEA MODBUS6 LIB Modbus Driver for G6L CUEB G6L CUEC 4 After online connected select Write via Flash memory in menu Online as below Cnet Frame Editor C GMWIN3 S SOURCEWCHE T GMb6_CH Online Lonnect Hull Modem init Lommansg Flash Memory j saw g 8 Hone 1 5 If Write flash memory is selected the following dialog box for library writing is displayed Sele
216. ng 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v DM_NAME shall be the name at that time when downloaded or defaultname of P_ Domain v_PI_N_LEN and DM _LEN are allowable within H01 H10 2 Response format for PLC of ACK response A M CK m TX ASCI valu so moe nase v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format rome tx ac mo mm oa em ec v BCC When command is one of lower case m only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 7 78 Chapter 7 Communication function 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response Station Error code Header Command Command type Tail Frame check ame Ew e ASCII value ao woo mae a m v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format Y BCC When command is one of lower case m only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see Appendix B Error Code Table 4 Example of use In case PI name is executed as specified to PLC_RUN in the state that Domain name has been downloaded in PGM ofPLC Computer request format
217. ng Hecerved Data Sasa AAE AERA Ta oe EEA TENA if a i i DSS 207 x a Ho DeSsoo F af A e ro yw zJ y eS T ml p p g nenon sej Hanna p a a cA 7 a a T D s Osm EEIE P g g B a A Sx Weve D 0p p OLX x oe eeo won ogna a pi ar mo a a era so eu T gt S ns g aera Je 10 Ja Ji 410 10 10 E 5 28 Chapter 5 Frame Editor 2 Transmission monitor Transmission monitor is used to check and monitor data if actually transmitted from Cnet I F module via null modem cable connecting PC with RS 232C communication channel of Cnet I F module as in Figure 5 12 A First connectRS 232C cable to RS 232C port of Cnet I F module to monitor Figure 5 12 How to connecttransmission monitor cable Cable connection of RS 232C B If Monitor Send Frame is selected in Frame Editor the following dialog box for parameter setting is shown herein input basic parameters of Cnet I F module as communication speed number of data bits parity bits and stop bits and then press OK button Para C Set communication parameters as of RS 232C channel in Cnet I F module D Press Start button in transmission monitor screen as the figure below to display data which Is in transmission 5 29 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Send Frames JeqgDORSSO104 MBO0eteqgO0RS 1S0104 MBO0eteqQD0ASSO104 MBOeteq
218. ng from 1 is available As for Word areas max 4999 addresses only are accessible 10 kbytes 7 124 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 5 GMWIN remote connection 7 5 1 Introduction If PC executed by GMWIN is located far from GLOFA PLC remote PLC program can be controlled for download upload debugging monitorering etc through GMWIN remote connection function of Cnet I F module Especially in case that GMWIN is located far away from PLC PLC CPU can be conveniently accessible through telephoning remote connecting and computer linked modem connecting functions in GMWIN via public line Remote connection which is supported in Fnet Mnet Enet and Cnet of GLOFA PLC communication modules allows connection between networks to control remote PLC program via multi steps connection conveniently GMWIN remote connection via Cnet I F module are available all for 2 cases of remote connection between Cnet I F modules where GMWIN and PLC are directly connected via RS 232C and modem connection between GMWIN and PLC 7 5 2 GMWIN remote connection Figure 7 23 shows an example of remote connection between GMWIN and PLC via modem As shown in the figure this structure is required for connection with PLC via phone line dedicated line modem or wireless modem if GMWIN operated PC is located far from PLC In this case GMWIN shall be connected via direct modem with Cnet I F module and the modem shall be set to connection type in connection option Mode
219. nication via ASCII data Error check through LRC Frame structure AS Cll data End CR LF LY RTU mode Communication via HEX data Error check through 16 bit CRC Frame structure HE X data Star 7 122 Chapter 7 Communication function 2 Cnet supported MODBUS Command Cnets MODBUS communication driver supports reading writing commands of Bit amp Word areas among commands used in MODBUS Controller Table 7 31 describes the commands supported in Cnet MODBUS communication driver Other function codes than described in Table 7 31 are not responded to Table 7 31 MODBUS communication driver supported function code Function GLOFA PLC Name Address Note1 Remark code address ore or Read coistaus Oxwnlbitoutput MXB 4MX9999 sitRead x 999 NW 4s NW 4s x 99 o presetsingereg rvotnor ourut __ sm ivi 409 Presel Multi Reg 4xxxx word output MW1 MW4999 Word Write Remark Note 1 Address area of MODICON Controller has the range of 1 9999 Namely standard of address start is set to 1 thus M area of GLOFA PLC is mapped in MODBUS memory from MW1 1 9999 can be set in MODBUS however 1 4999 is available for M area memory as of 10 K bytes open to MODBUS in Cnet MODBUS communication driver 3 GLOFA PLC Address Mapping Direct variable areas of GLOFA PLC are M Q and l areas MODBUS communication driver has access to 10K bytes MW1 MW4999 of M area which Is an internal
220. not used RS 422 station No Basic value Not used a Communication speed and basic Communication type RS 422 communication spec shall be as specified in 9600 BPS DATA 8 bits l RS 422 basic parameters spec of MJ 71UC24 computer link module START 1 bit STOP 1 bit Chapter 8 Exercising program 2 Communication protocol Communication protocol to communicate with MJ 71UC24 computer link module is as follows Figure 8 13 TX sequence of TX RX frames A Read request frame B Response data C Immediate response frame DIONTLL N DaS OD If GLOFA Cnet sends A Read request frame first MJ 71UC24 to respond to this reads data of applicable area to transmit B Response data frame and Cnet I F module sends C Immediately Response frame to inform MJ 71UC 24 of data received Nextis TX RX frame structure A Read egesi frame Cnets request Read request of 12 words in D0100 of station 1 B Response format to total Read Response of MJ 71UC24 side oo lea ls Data 12 words of D0100 address C Immediate response Classification Station No PLC No Next is for communication frame contents Refer to the user s manual of GOLDSEC M computer link unit for more information Q Station No Station No station 1 of MJ 71UC24 LIPLC No Set to FF Q Command WR Total Read command of word unit in device memory Chapter 8 Exercising program Q Message wait Min stand by time until transmitted
221. nto ASCII added to BCC and sent v Number of data means Byte number of HEX type and is converted into ASCII This number is determined according to command type of computer request format Table7 19 Number of data according to variable data type aiid Command type Number of Data type a data UDINT ULINT EN T EE REAL LREAL 10 Max 60 Bytes Max 60 Bytes 7 53 Chapter 7 Communication function Ex 1 Data number of H04 ASCII code value H3034 indicates that 4 byte data in HEX is in the data DOUBLE WORD HEX data of 4 bytes is as converted into ASCII code in data Values of ASCII code converted from HEX data are in data area Ex 2 If the number of data is H04 and the data is H12345678 ASCII code converted value of this is 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 which is input in data area Namely the highest value comes first and the lowest last Remark Note 1 If data type is BOOL data read is indicated by one byte of HEX Namely if bit value is 0 itis indicated by H00 and if 1 itis indicated by H01 Note 2 If command type is array H15 H27 upper nibble of lower byte of the data is first and lower nibble of lower byte is last in the data area except the case that data type of array is BOOL and data size is 1 byte BYTE USINT SINT Ex 3 For example it is supposed that in the variable ABC 2 of which data type is DINT and array size Is 2 data Is entered as below ABC 0 H12345678 ABC 1 9ABCDEF0
222. number in Frame Editor and if the already registered number is registered again currently executed one is registered v Registered format is used from command to EOT among formats of individual reading of direct variables continuous reading and reading of named variables with the format setting as below X Registered format The registered format among request formats can choose only one out of 3 services below 1 Individual reading of direct variables RSS Number of blocks 2 Bytes Variable length 2 Bytes Variable name 16 Bytes fo 1 block Max 4 16 blocks Note1 2 Continuous reading of direct variables RSB Variable length 2 Bytes Variable name 16 Bytes Number of data lblock only can be set 3 Named variable reading Number of blocks 2 Bytes Variable length 2 Bytes Variable name 16 Bytes 1 block Max 4 16 blockstNote Remark Note 1 The number of blocks can be set up to 16 blocks from 4 blocks according to setting condition of monitor registration number However setting up to 16 blocks Is available only in Ver 1 4 or later 3 Response format for PLC of ACK response a a re Frame E mal a l ue v Station number commands and register No are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case x only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 4 R
223. o ATZ Table 5 2 describes items of basic parameters which are to be set basically Basic parameters are set respectively according to channels of RS 232C and RS 422 with setting values saved respectively per communication channel Figure 5 2 shows setting screen of each item in basic parameter screen Table5 2 Setting items of basic parameters Setting item Set module station No used in dedicated mode and other Station l stations 0 31 company s dedicated mode If communication channel is RS 232C set to communication type Null modem Modem of RS 232C channel Dedicated modem If communication channel is RS 422 set to communication type of RS 422 RS 485 RS 422 channel Type Baud Rate Set communication speed per channel 300 76800 bpsiNotetl Data bit Number of data bits in asynchronous communication type 7 8 bits l Number of stop bits required for asynchronous communication l Stop bit 1 2 bits type Remark Note1 Communication speeds can be set up to 38400bps for RS 232C channel and up to 76800bps for RS 422 channel Chapter 5 Frame Editor 5 2 2 Frame setting Frame setting is for definition of protocol to allow Cnet I F module to communicate as agreed with protocol of the other s device if used in user defined mode Frame is a basic setting item surely required for user defined communication and TX RX program using this shall be composed in GMWIN Frame edit can be set up to 64 respectively according
224. o 120 byte of data available Note1 It means that the number of data shall be set in unit of byte HEX input 0123456789 gt setting available The number of data is 10 HEX input 012345678 gt setting unavailable The number of data is 9 Note2 If data is 00 it shall be set to Array Note3 Array setting up to 4 of 8 segments Is available Table 5 4 shows transmitted data flow when data type is set to Convert or None It is supposed that 4 byte data of 12 34 56 78 Is transmitted in PLC Table5 4 Example of transmitted data conversion based on data type setting f Convert selected Data of PLC side 12345678 123456078 Data ASCII conversion No ASCII conversion conversion Correspondent 5 l 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 12345678 device As for Table5 4 if not converted into ASCII data of PLC transmission area is transmitted as it is causing data to be sent in HEX to the other device 5 11 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Table 5 5 Example of received data conversion based on data type setting f Convert selected Data of PLC side 12345678 31 32 33 34 35 30 31 30 Data l ASCII conversion No ASCII conversion conversion Correspondent 5 E 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 evice Table5 5 shows that desired HEX data can be received by setting the data type to Convert in Cnet when ASCII code is transmitted by the correspondent device If None is selected ASCII code is di
225. o convert HEX data to ASCII code for transmission Next is the input result of segment area Set 2 segments of CONST and ARRAY Set Tail and BCC Select BCC setting button and set the range of SUM1 in dialog box for BCC setting to H 0 T 0 in order to set BCC as added from Header to Tail Refer to Chapter 5 Frame Editor for details of BCC setting H O T 0 7 16 Chapter 7 Communication function Transmission frame where setting of Header Tail and Segment is completed is shown in Figure 7 7 To transmit transmission frame along with data a transmission program Is to be prepared in GMWIN program via SND_MSG Function Block Figure7 7 Setting screen of Write request frame 2 Registration of Read data frame Read data frame of frame structure as in Table 7 7 is registered according to the sequence below Select the 24 item of frame list in Frame Editor and input RD DATA to frame name And then select RECEIVE in TX RX input IMM RESPONSE in immediate response frame and data below to Header Next is the input result The 2th Main Frame RD_DATA STA Input segment Since RD24 in receiving frame body area of Table 7 7 is constant area unchanged set it to CONST and input RD24 Since data area is variable area changeable per receiving frame set type to ARRAY input RD1 and input 24 the number of receiving data to size As for receiving data which is ASCII figure
226. odules is set to master station Dedicated modem or dial up modem is available to use Ooovwdsvouvo vo Cnet I F module is set to stand alone mode Figure 6 3 Dedicated modem communication with PC GLOFA FLC GLOFA FLG GLOFA FIC Cool 1 Coal 7 AS 422 INTERFACE Module setting RS 232C RS 422 Channel mode Station No Dedicated master Stand alone PLC Cnet 1 Dedicated mode 1 User defined channel Cnet 1 31 Not used Dedicated mode pianiesalolle 2 3 channel Chapter 6 System configuration 6 1 4 Communication between PC and Cnet using interlocking channel LI PC is operated as a master station of Cnet 1 N station LI PC and Cnet 1 station carry out communication through null modem via RS 232C channel Q PC as a master station carry out RS 422 communication with Cnet 2 N station via Cnet 1 station in interlocking channel Q PC and Cnet 1 station perform RS 232C channel communication Q Communication between Cnet I F modules is unavailable Q Cnet I F module can connect with max 32 stations RS 422 communication Q Cnet 1 station is set to interlocking mode and Cnet 2 N station are set to stand alone mode Q All Cnet I F modules shall be set to idedntical communication speed and operation mode Figure 6 4 Dedicated modem communication with PC MMI PC RS 232C Interface GLOFA PLC GLOFA PLC GLOFA PLC Cnet 1 Cnet 2 Cnet N Ea j ia ym 4 5 Li AL L Interlo
227. ollows 1 Let RS 232C RS 422 channels connected respectively as shown in Figure 9 2 amp Figure 9 3 2 Set operation mode setting switch to Loop Back Test mode 3 After self diagnosis is started as powered on check LED display per channel if normal or not 4 Self diagnosis will be repeated until powered off a 9 2 RS 232C cable connection seg a Connection No and Signal direction tata a Cable connection 9 2 Chapter 9 Diagnosis function 9 1 3 Operation of Loop Back test LED This module sends itself Loop Back test data applied as changed and receives the data to display the result compared on LED LED status represents the such two cases below of the front LED display switch as pushed and not pushed 1 Nextis LED display status when normal and abnormal in case LED display switch is not pushed Table 9 1 describes LED display items of G3L CUEA G4L CUEA modules and Table 9 2 describes LED display items of GO6L CUEB G6L CUEC modules when normal and abnormal Table 9 1 LED status depending on operation contents G3L CUEA G4L CUEA LED No Name LED status normal LED status abnormal ss or ACK On ACK responding OFF No ACK response NO NAK response NAK response on No NAK response occurred 7 SYS RUN Dimly ON CPU amp I F executed CPUGI F stopped zc U No transmission No receiving f ar ACK ACK responding OFF No ACK response N X No NAK response No NAK response mmunic
228. ommunication function v in program of Figure 7 17 RD START is a contact point to start READ F B and is set after WRITE F B is executed An initial value of it is set to operate READ F B at the first scan of program WR_START Is a contact point to start WRITE F B and is set after READ F B is executed to run WRITE FB All two variables are allocated to auto variables After one dedicated Function Block is executed through the contact point and 1 sec timer above operation in order by the next Function Block is available in a cycle of sec 1 sec timer Is used to prevent unnecessary communication overload by setting the min execution cycle of Function Block to 1 second This timer is adjustable based on application conditions of user s v If program of Figure 7 17 is downloaded to PLC set to master station programming for 3 stations communication in Figure 7 16 is completed No need to prepare communication program or to set frame in Slave PLC Communication will be started if PLC program is switched to operation Run by setting Cnet I F module to dedicated mode as connected with RS 422 cable If communication is normal NDR output of GM_RD amp GM _ WR Function Blocks is turned ON in accordance with the execution cycle of Function Block and if communication is not normal ERR output is ON with error code displayed on STATUS Table 7 25 describes error status according to output STATUS values in case error occurs Refer to those
229. ommunication method Protocol and mode Parity l Communication l Baud rate Data bit l Stop bit User defined bit channel RS232C null None 1 modem or Master RS 422 485 1 Not defined 2 Not defined 13 Not defined 14 Not defined 15 Not defined 16 Not defined Not defined 18 Not defined 19 Not defined 10 Not defined 111 Not defined o 12 Not defined 413 Not defined 114 Not defined 415 Not defined Chapter 8 Exercising program E Double click on frame list 0 to activate Frame 0 window and set as shown in the figure below Frame 0 F fi j SND_FRAME Ii jz yy lle ter Oo heer Jena F After setting press BCC setting button as BCC is set to tail and set BCC as in the figure below if BCC setting window is activated and then click on OK button a oe PHT tst lt CS sti i S x 0l Chapter 8 Exercising program 0 Send 41 Not defined 2 Not defined 13 Not defined 74 Not defined 75 Sot defined 6 Not defined Not defined 48 Not defined 19 Not defined 10 Not defined 411 Not defined 112 Not defined 13 Not defined 14 Not defined 15 Not defined H Double click on the following frame list 1 and activate Frame 1 window to set as in the figure below Frama 1 ema oor t beret i fone noe g Chapter 8 Exercising program fem sm Type CONST Field RCV FRAME ASCII input selection button Type ARRAY Field MB10 Size 4 bytes
230. on Chapter 2 Definition of terms 11 Half Duplex Communication Two way communication is available however simultaneous communication of transmission amp receiving isn t available This communication type is applied to RS 485 for instance It is used a lot for multi drop communication type which communicates via one signal line by several stations Half Duplex Communication results from the transmission characteristic performed by stations one by one not allowing simultaneous transmission by multi stations due to the data damage of data impact caused by the simultaneous multi transmission of the stations The figure below shows an example of structure based on Half Duplex Communication Each station in communication with the terminal as linked with each other can send or receive data via one line so to execute communication with all stations where multi master is advantageously available Master station Master station Master station Master station Master station 12 Full Duplex Communication Two way communication of simultaneous transmission amp receiving is available This communication type is applied to RS 232C amp RS 422 Master station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station 2 4 Chapter 2 Definition of terms Since the transmission line is separated from the receiving line simultaneous transmission amp receiving is available without data impact so called as Full Duplex Communication The
231. on and GMWIN modes Table4 3 shows operation modes where modem connection is available As in Table modem connection is not available in interlocking mode but only in stand alone mode If connecting with modem after interlocking mode is set beware of modem communication which isn t available due to null modem operation 4 21 Chapter 4 Performance specification Remark Note1 This module can be connected with dedicated modem dial up modem only via RS 232C channel Note2 For such modems as optical modem and wireless modem supporting RS 422 communication communication via RS 422 channel is available without additional setting in Cnet I F module Table4 5 Switches available to connect with modem Module type Switch value G6L CUEB G6L CUEC o Unavailable Unavailable _ Available Unavailable Available Available Unavailable a Available Availabe Notuseo Not used Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Not used Not used Not used Available Available Not used Available Available Not used Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Available if set to stand alone channel in Ver 2 0 G6L CUEB module only available in Ver 2 0 er 2 0 Not used Unavailable Basic setting sequence of Cnet I F module with Frame Editor is as follows 1 Run Frame Editor program in Windows 2 Select RS 232C of communication channel in basic parameter items of Frame Editor and set such transmission specifications of communicat
232. or Connector connection with external devices 3 8 Chapter 3 Product specification 3 5 3 Part names of G6L CUEB RUN NAK TX COM ERROR RX MODEM No Name Contents ACK SYS RUNERR ao B G6L CUEB 7 LED displaying Indication of operating status of G6L section CUEB see Appendix A Setting of operation mode see 4 1 Mode switch a RS 232C Connector for connection Connector with external devices OoO0000 oo0oo0oo O 3 9 Chapter 3 Product specification 3 5 4 Part names of G6L CUEC RUN NAK RS 485 SYS RUNJERR LED displaying Indication of operating status of G6L eer eee section CUEC see Appendix A Setting of operation mode Mode switch see 4 1 4 RS 422 485 Connectors for connection Connector with external devices RS 422 485 3 10 Chapter 3 Product specification 3 5 5 Part names of G7L CUEB PWR TX CTS GLOFA OOO0C0O G7L CUEB RX DSR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Conn LED displaying section See LED display Mode switch For selecting of TM TC operation Connectors for connection with digital 1 0 For extended connector module and special module RS 232C connector Connectors for connection with external devices 3 11 Chapter 3 Product specification 3 5 6 Part names of G7L CUEC G7L CUEC PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER RS 422 485 interface Connectors for connection with external devices LED displaying section See LED display
233. other company s protocols in GLOFA PLC for communication between Cnet I F module and other company s devices Since lots of different communication protocols produced by various makers of communication devices are used all the different protocols can t be built in communication module Thus user is to define protocol and to configure program in accordance with its application field in order to communicate with other company s devices on the basis of the defined protocol in Cnet I F module Such a tool to define protocol frame shall be used for this as Frame Editor provided along with Cnet I F module to compose and edit other company s protocol For user defined mode exact contents of protocol to use shall be known to communicate exact data User defined protocol frame can be downloaded or uploaded via Frame Editor to Cnet I F module and the saved contents are kept indelibly inside Cnet I F module for use even though powered off In addition to frame edit programming by Function Block which controls transmission receiving in PLC shall be performed for user defined mode service This chapter describes the communication specification of user defined mode and the way to use As Gm7 Cnet series is different from the other Cnet I F modules in its application please read the user definition in 7 1 5 G7L CUEC carefully Table 7 1 Operation mode of Cnet I F module that is operated in user defined mode et Mode Operation mode P odule name emar switc
234. parameter by command control characters ENQ ACK EOT ETX for synchronization parity for detecting error and BCC The structure of frame used for serial communication of Cnet is as follows 2 5 Chapter 2 Definition of terms Structure of general TX RX frame Required frame _ Station Header Segment Tail a Command Parameter by command No 1 Header ASCII value indicating frame start 2 Tail ASCII value indicating frame end 3 BCC Block Check Character BCC as of check data for TX RX frame is to inspect reliability of data with such various methods as ADD OR EXR and MULTIPLY Chapter 3 Product specification Chapter 3 Product specification 3 1 General specification Table 3 1 describes the environmental electric and mechanical specifications of this module Table 3 1 General specification w en OOo e O e 0 C 55 C E 2 Storage temp 25 C 70 C Lt 3 Operating moist 5 95 RH non condensing OO 5 95 RH non condensing aa A For discontinuous vibration Frequency Amplitude vibri i 57 lt f lt 150 9 8 O 1G ibration proo j For discontinuous vibration Each 10 IEC 61131 2 times in X Y Z ozs 0 035mm zate asnos Max impact acceleration 147 15G Impact proof Authorized time 11 IEC 61131 2 Pulse wave Sign half wave pulse Each 3 times in X Y Z directions Square wave impulse noise 1 500V ye ae ele AEE Industrial Sys
235. r Q Data I O channel data of temperature controller Q Status Indicates the status of response frame 00 if displayed means response successful LY BCC HEX data sum from Device ID next to header to BCC prior 4 Frame edit Define 3 frames above through Frame Editor to download to Cnet I F module A Write request frame Write request frame as of TX frame is configured to send data to specified protocol through segment of ARRAY type Next is Frame Editor screen of TX frame edited CON WR is entered in frame name CONST in segment 1 HEX for channel number in Device ID ARRAY variable in segment 2 and 24 bytes for TX number of data Chapter 8 Exercising program Enter None for Array type to send TX data in HEX without ASCII conversion As is TX frame set TX RX to Send Enter BCC in tail and set BCC as below with data only inside segment added to send 1 byte BCC data in HEX value together Set the range of S 0 S 27 as the data length of segment is 28 bytes MCU MGitamc BT B Read request frame It is TX frame to read channel data through temperature controller in Cnet TX frame for Read request shall be registered as follows Input CON RD for frame name Because TX frame has no data area use just one segment set to Constant Set BCC in front of tail and let BCC checked BCC checking range and calculation method are same as in Write request frame Chapter 8 Exercising program The 2 oth Main Frame Frame es
236. r 6 System configuration 6 2 System configuration unavailable 6 2 1 Dial up modem communication between Cnet I F modules Q Cnet I F module has no function to make telephone calls Q Cnet I F module has only function to answer telephone calls Q Dial up modem communication between Cnet I F modules is unavailable Figure 6 10 Dial up modem communication between Cnet I F modules Cnet 1 Cnet 2 m eam e LE LE ki LE ee RS 232C cable P ublic line _ Relay station Public line Chapter 6 System configuration 6 2 2 GMWIN connection using RS 422 channel of Cnet I F module LY GMWIN service of Cnet I F module supports only RS 232C channel LY GMWIN connection via RS 422 channel is unavailable Q Setting of Cnet s station number in GMWIN remote connection Is unavailable LY GMWIN connection is available only for Cnet 1 station as shown in Figure 6 11 Figure 6 11 GMWIN connection via RS 422 channel GMWIN remote connection Ta R TR a 7a E M L Ld ele m as Interlocking channel GMWIN mode y RS 422 Interface 6 11 Connection available ON ig ___Connection unavailable H Connection unavailable oo GLOFA PLC GLOFA PLC GLOFA PLC Cnet 1 Cnet 2 Cnet N GMWIN mode Chapter 7 Communication function Chapter 7 Communication function 7 1 User defined communication 7 1 1 Introduction User defined communication is the mode with which user can define
237. r CONST and ARRAY data in the figure F Set tail Tail as of an area to sort out the end of frame can be set with control character signal figure etc as in header If several characters are used with signals of T and J available to be set as in header max 8 can be continued as applied In addition BCC is serviceable for detection of errors in tail BCC shall be surely set for BCC service For BCC service press BCC setting button on the right to select calculation method and range of BCC EOT E TA BCC E TA CR LF G BCC setting BCC provides check information on frame error by setting BCC to tail for BCC check If BCC check is Selected BCC data is transmitted along with for transmitted frame and only correct BCC value of received data is received for received frame according to setting method The next figure is BCC setting screen when BCC setting button is pressed with BCC type and mode available to be set Exercising of basic setting is shown as in Figure 5 5 5 13 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Figure 5 5 Example of BCC basic setting BCC Setting Data Type Set selecting type of BCC calculation result to ASCII or HEX in frame Q ASCII Insert BCC calculation result as converted into ASCII data in BCC area with 2 byte of BCC value available to be transmitted and received Q HEX Insert BCC calculation result as converted into HEX data in BCC area with 1 byte of BCC value ava
238. rame only Similarly to this if All is selected basic parameter and frame can be written ata time Note2 Check the power status of PLC prior to writing of parameter or frame If powered off while writing data in flash memory of Cnet I F module may be crushed Note3 Switch over PLC to STOP mode when writing parameter and frame If writing while PLC running writing error may occur In this case power off and then let it on back to perform writing again after Switching over PLC to STOP mode If writing of parameters is completed the completion message as in the following figure is displayed Transter Basic Parameters Pa IEIET Be palace 9 TIE We Maco T aa n ra a UTG pa mal er a ial a Fe 3 prr ba rih Ba na al dy r i ireren E era If parameter writing is performed Cnet operation of the correspondent channel stops Therefore after parameter writing is completed select Online Change RUN STOP to switch operation of the correspondent channel over to run 4 15 Chapter 4 Performance specification Select the slot No of computer link module and the channel of operation to switch over in the dialog box for operation change and click on Run button to start the correspondent channel Change Aun sotop In these methods run the correspondent channel to start operation after basic parameters are set and written according to channels RS 232C RS 422 4 3 3 Reading setting values Basic parameters sav
239. rcccccssscceecsssceeccccsscecccsssseeccsssseeecssseeeeees 5 39 Chapter 6 System configuration Pree ee ee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee ee ee ee ee 6 1 6 11 6 1 System configuration AVallaDlOccscccc cess cece ccesccccccccececccccscccccssssscvccssssssccssssssecssceees 6 1 6 1 1 1 1 connection no modem to PC eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecoeoesoooooooooooososococcecececcecececoeoeooo 6 1 6 1 2 1 1 dedicated modem connection to PC seeeeeesesseeeseesesssesesesososessooososooososososossoooosee 6 2 6 1 3 Modem connection to PC amp communication between Cnet I F modulessssesseseeeeeeeseeeeeeesees 6 3 6 1 4 Communication between PC and Cnet using interlocking channel sssseeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeees 6 4 6 1 5 Interlocking amp Stand alone channel COMMUNICatlONessccrcrrrcr cesses esses ests eee eeeee essen ccesens 6 5 6 1 6 Dedicated communication to PC amp other company s RS 422 communication seseseeseeeeeeeeeeees 6 6 6 1 7 Optical modem communication TOF mobile communication sssereeeseeerererereerereeerereeereresees 6 7 6 1 8 Wireless modem communication between revolution bodies sssesssseeseeeeeseereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 8 6 1 9 TM TC communication system Ene gaia a vui ier E ela oe e s are E oie exe ayuiw Wen eel eee aa ete eladere a levaue wise ee Grace E els 6 9 6 2 System configuration unavailable VT ree re ee eT Tee Te Te Te ET ee ee ee Or re ere rr eee a ee 6 10 6 2 1 Dial up modem communication between Cnet I F MOGUISS terete sienecinntneses cnet emereet
240. re TX RX program with SND _MSG RCV_MSG in GMWIN for TX RX by the prepared frame Program for frame transmission and RX data saving shall be also prepared in GMWIN Figure 8 17 shows GMWIN program for communication with MASTER K 1000H With 1 sec timer MK_WR frame is transmitted in a cycle of 1 sec and TX area of MB200 is allocated in SD1 area of TX frame to transmit 20 bytes starting from MW100 address Download the program shown in Figure 8 17 to PLC and run program to allow TX RX through Cnet Figure 8 17 MASTER K 1000H communication program MKACK RX Function Block is a checking program of MASTER K1000H response which is omissible as free of RX data and non influential on communication TX data saving area where SD1 is allocated to variable MB200 specifying Array 21 Chapter 8 Exercising program 8 6 Communication with HEX communication equipment Communication with devices which communicate with GLOFA PLC through HEX protocol is described as below HEX communication needs only half amount of ASCII communication data so it enables double speed communication comparatively even in the same communication speed The figure shows an example of user defined mode communication of Cnet I F module as a master station with temperature controller which performs HEX communication 12 word data per channel of temperature input 12 channels of temperature controller are read one by one and saved to MB300 address of GLOFA PL
241. re cence cere sere eee sees esses sees eee seseseseesseeesesesesees 4 19 4 4 1 Connection to dedicated modem RS 232C Cece c rere cece cere cece cece seers ee seeeeeeseeeeeesscens 4 20 4 4 2 Connection to dial up modem RS 232C Comoe merece cece eer eee eee e eee ee cece ee eeeseeeseseseeeeeees 4 27 Chapter 5 Frame Editor eoooesooosoooocococooocoooooooocoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo 5 1 5 43 5 1 Basic functions Sn i 5 5 2 Screen configuration and MenU eeeseeseeeseesosessocososssooososeooooooseooooossooooooseoooooseeeos 5 2 5 2 1 Basic parameter setting Se a 5 6 5 2 2 Frame setting Seem cere cree reece cere eres eee ese sees see sees sees esses eee eee ees eee eee ees eeseeseeeseseseeere 5 5 2 3 Frame writing reading coeeesoooesoooosooooeesoooooooooeooooesoooosooooeecoooosoooooooooesooooooooooooo 5 23 5 2 4 Monitor function cesesocoococoooosooooooosocoooosoososoosocosoosocooooooosoocoososoooosooooooooooooooooo 5 27 5 3 Managing function of flash CRO Ly Ae terere at ewe sete enti at sewn seems eet Reo Rete Rare ae Meee rs 5 31 5 3 1 Writing of flash MEMO rear r a palma wore Sin giniale Prep ricer aie ae 5 31 5 3 2 Reading of flash MEMON A ra a E O EE E 5 34 54 Changing ofonline mode s sseeseeseseseeesesesssosessososesososssoooosooososesosoosooooosososossooooes 5 35 5 4 1 Changing of local operating MOAR rrccsrcrcsscccesscceceseeeeecessseecccesseeescsssseescssssseccccens 5 35 5 4 2 Changing of remote operating MOAR rrrrccss
242. rectly sentto PLC as received In case of communication in character data receiving of character data is available if the data type None is selected Input the right data area as described below after setting CONST and ARRAY in segment type Q If segment type is CONST input fixed area of frame Q If segment type is ARRAY transmission set one of SD1 SD2 SD3 and SD4 Q If segment type is ARRAY receiving set one of RD1 RD2 RD3 and RD4 Data size needs setting only for ARRAY up to 120 byte per segment As max length of one frame is limited to 256 byte the total data length of 8 segments shall be set not more than 256 byte The figure below describes for the details lt 1 frame Max 256 byte __ SEG T SEG 2 SECS SEGA SEGS ESEG O SEG To seGic lt gt Max length per segment 120 byte Figure 5 4 shows the frame edit screen where ASCII data OOWB of CONST type is input in segment 1 and CONVERT is set to ARRAY type in segment 2 in accordance with the setting method above 9 12 Chapter 5 Frame Editor Figure5 4 Transmitted frame setting b ARRAY data input 4 byte Since the structure of transmitted data is classified into fixed data area of OOWB and variable data area of 12345678 0OWB of ASCII type is input in CONST area and Convert is selected in ARRAY area for transmission of variable data area with 4 byte of transmission data designated as in Figure5 4 2 Segments are used fo
243. red Table 10 4 Regular check items Check item How to check Action to take Ambient temperature Ld ae Adjust as specified in general Measure with Spec Ambient Ambient moisture thermometer 5 95 R H If used in panel as based on conditions hygrometer ambient criteria in panel l l Measure corrosive No corrosive gas Ambient pollution gas allowed Move Module Loosening shaking communication As mounted firmly Tighten screw Dust foreign matters By the naked eye Shall not be attached D Terminal screw l cae l Tighten with driver Shall not be loosened Tighten loosened Connection Compressed terminal By the naked eye As distanced suitable Correct status close Tighten connector locking Connector loosened By the naked eye Shall not be loosened screw Measure voltage between AC 85 132V Power voltage check Modify power supply AC 110 220V AC 170 264V terminals 10 9 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Chapter 11 Troubleshooting This chapter describes various error contents expected in system operation and their causes to make diagnoses on and take action against Tables in Section 11 1 below show the case the module is in abnormal operation The troubleshooting will be guided in Section 11 2 according to each error code of the tables 11 1 Abnormal operations Table 11 1 Hardware and system error Refer to Appendix LED indication during abnormal operation Error code Error indica
244. release connection in remote connection status select Disconnect in On line menu to display Disconnect menu box as in the figure below indicating Disconnected GHWIN ia i There are disconnected remote 1 stage If connection is released normally Cnet I F module and GMWIN are changed to initial mode to allow re connection when tried again starting from clause No 1 G In addition to dedicated modem optical modem and wireless modem also can be used equally for remote connection though communication medium between modems differs from each other Figure 7 26 shows an example of remote connection via wireless modem Connection method is same as in the remote connection via communication between Cnet I F module When wireless modem is applied remote connection in 1 N system where several remote Cnet I F module stations are in existence is also available 7 134 Chapter 7 Communication function Figure 7 26 Remote connection via wireless modem a Remote connection RS 232C Interface apee Wireless modem Wireless modem 7 135 Chapter 8 Exercising program Chapter 8 Exercising program Communication system using Cnet I F module can be variously configured according to application fields This chapter describes system configuration and exercise programming with various application fields supposed 8 1 TM Tele Metering system using dedicated modem In TM ma
245. request format This can be set up to 4 blocks Therefore the value of Number of blocks must be H01 ASCII value 3031 HO4 ASCII value 3034 v Variable length name length of direct variable This indicates the number of name s characters that means direct variable which is allowed up to 16 characters This value is one of ASCII converted from HEX type and the range is from HO1 ASCII value 3031 to H10 ASCII value 3130 v Variable name Input address of variable to be read actually in ASCII value within 16 characters Others than figure upper lower cases and are not allowed for variable name BCC When command is one of lower case r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ENQ to EOT is converted into ASCII and added to BCC Remark Note 1 Numerical data of frame Ex is HEX value and H is unnecessary during preparing real frame 7 43 Chapter 7 Communication function Directvariables available according to PLC type are as follows Table 7 15 Type of direct variables Double wor YMX QX IX YMX QX IX YMX QX IX YMX QX IX YMX QX IX YMX QX IX 7oMB QB IB 7oMB QB IB 7oMB QB IB 7oMB QB IB YoMB QB IB 7oMB QB IB MW QW IW MW QW IW MW QW IW MW QW IW MW QW IW MW QW IW MD QD D MD QD D MD QD D MD QD D MD QD D MD QD D YoML
246. response after execution of command ASCII value 7 H3031 H4D 6D H444E Error code 4 ef ef 7 81 Chapter 7 Communication function C1 Program download start command PDN PDD GLOFA Gm series have user program of compile type so they can not partly perform download by specifying step address of the existing PLC Therefore download upload of program have the entire process with the initialization of start command and using download upload commands GLOFA Gm series call user program with PI command the Domain This domain has similar characteristics to the existing PLC program But it is different that the domain may be deleted and has several domains Program download start command is an initialization service when it performs domain program download service If this service is successful download the program by using program download command The program to be downloaded is a file extension name BNO created by execution of Make of Compile menu in PADT Remark Note 1 The delay time between this command and program download command must be within 1 sec 1 Request format PC gt PLC i ke Size Perde econ Cantina hase oa ean len eee DEN AME No type 5 Dec 4 Bytes Frame Ex EQN H10 P p DN D H05 LGPLC 00038000 ASCII H4C47504C H05 H3130 H50 70 H444E 44 H3035 H3030303338303030 value 43 v DM_LEN displays the number of Domain name s characters in the range of H01 H10 v DM _NAME displays
247. rite is indicated by one byte of HEX Namely if bit value is 0 it is indicated by H00 3030 and if 1 itis indicated by H01 3031 2 Response format for PLC of ACK response eo Ex ASC val saa con asim sa a v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case w only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 3 Response format for PLC of NAK response Command Error code Header Station No Command Fame x Pea ae ok 5 ASCII value is H3230 H5707 H5353 H34323532 v Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format Y BCC When command is one of lower case w only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from NAK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent 7 60 Chapter 7 Communication function v Error code is HEX and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes which indicates type of error For the details see Appendix B Error Code Table 4 Example of use In case HFF is written in MW230 address of station No 1 Computer request format Comman Staton Comman Number Variable name Variable Frame Header d data Tail No d ie of blocks name check ame Ew amuzo Hook H254D5732 ASCII value H05 H3031 H57 77 H5353 H3031 H
248. rk Note 1 If communication is overloaded remote connection may fail Surely switch PLC to STOP to stop communication prior to remote connection D Run GMWIN program and select connection type from project option to specify connection type Select connection type of RS 232C and communication port as in local connection E Select Remote 1 of connection stages and set Station No Station No set in Cnet I F module shall be input Remote Cnet is set No 22 in the figure below Remark Note 1 Station No shall be input in Cnet Ver2 0 or later In case of earlier Ver setting of Station No is unnecessary Station No shall be set in frame editor F GMWIN tries remote connection and if remote connection is completed connection completed message is displayed as below G This means that remote 1 stage connection is completed just like the connection status that RS 232C cable is connected as moved where all functions in On line menu are available 7 133 Chapter 7 Communication function Remark Note 1 For application of GMWIN after remote connection On line menu can be used as in local connection Functions for program download upload monitor are available Note 2 PLC control via modem depends much on modem performance and phone line status If phone line is in deficient status connection may be released In this case try re connection not immediately but in approx 30 seconds starting from 1 H To
249. rned On Off in a twinkling which may be hard to recognize by naked eye however this is not indicating that Cnet I F module is in error if switched to normal operation mode later 9 6 Chapter 10 Installation and Testing operation Chapter 10 Installation and Testing operation 10 1 Installation and testing operation 4 types of Cnet I F modules are available according to CPU types An appropriate unit shall be selected for CPU type and applicable service Table 10 1 guides module selection in accordance with CPU types Table 10 1 How to select appropriate module for CPU type Notet cioraem cacuea 2 arsam e cioraema cacuea 2 arsam e cioracus acuea 2 arsam e we 1 s cue oao ra a ae GLOFA GM6 cncuvec 1 rne n Remark 1 1 i 1 Note1 Max number of units mountable means all communication modules If used with Fnet Enet Dnet I F module etc the number of all communication modules is limited by Table 10 1 For example max 2 Cnet I F modules only can be mounted on GM4 where 2 Fnet I F modules have been installed in Note2 If mounted on dual base only RS 422 channel is available Note3 Cnetcan be mounted not on extended base but on I O basic base only Note4 Mountable on slot No 0 3 of dual extended 8 base up to 8 Cnet I F modules including dual basic base Note5 As for GM7 unit 1 communication module can be mounted on via extension connector in additio
250. ronous communication This communication type transmits characters one by one synchronously in serial transmission At this time synchronous signal Clock etc is not transmitted Character code is transmitted with a start bit attached to the head of 1 character and itis finished with a stop bit attached to the tail For transmitting KOREA Transmission direction gt 5 7 A A T Stop Bit Parity Bit Data Bit Start Bit 2 2 Chapter 2 Definition of terms 4 Protocol This is communication rule established in relation between the transmission side and the receiving side of information in order to send and accept information between two computers terminals or more without error effectively and reliably In general this specifies call establishment connection structure of message exchange form re transmission of error message procedure of line inversion and character synchronization between terminals etc 5 BPS Bits Per Second and CPS Characters Per Second BPS is a unit of transfer rate that represents how many bits are transferred per second CPS is the number of the characters transferring for a second Generally one character is 1Byte 8Bits so CPS is the number of byte which can be transferred per second 6 Node Node is a term that means the connected nodes of the data in the network tree structure generally network is composed of a great number of nodes and Is also expressed as the station number 7
251. rough frame editor Contact Service station Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 11 2 6 Error code ERR 10 Error on GMWIN connection Modem connection error Is operation mode of Cnet I F Correct operation mode of Cnet F module correct module and supply power again Ng Grorincableconnechonain Check cable connection with modem and modem take action against Input the initializing command correctly Is modem initializing command entered correctly through frame editor Check modem if applied as specified in user s manual prior to making contact with Service station 11 11 Appendix Appendix A 1 LED indication specification A 1 1 Applicable type G3L CUEA G4L CUEA G6L CUEB G6L CUEC G L CUEB G7L CUEC A 1 2 LED indication specification during normal operation 1 Operation status indication when LED display switch not pushed Table A 1 G3L CUEA G4L CUEA Name On during RS 232C channel operation Flash in Flash Memory Write Mode Flash per cycle of 1sec TX __ _Onduring transmission via RS 232 Flash ifin communication RX Onduringreceivevia RS 232 Flash ifin communication UN TX RX On during ACK transmission Off after NAK transmission as On during NAK transmission Off after ACK transmission a TX RX CK AK MODEM On during setting modem communication mode E puueyp DEC SH ERR Protocol error On during SIO error Flash if in error rset a C srsaun on iy ng
252. s between 2 modems to use shall be set surely identical The basic value of initializing command is ATZ And since the initializing command differs according to modems AT command specified in user s manual for modem shall be input 2 Settransmission specification of communication speed data and stop bit in basic parameter items INote1 Remark Note1 Beware of the following items when setting basic parameters 1 Communication speed and setting values of data and stop bit in setting items of basic parameters are the transmission specification not between modem and modem but between DTE Cnet I F module and DCE modem Set basic parameters to basic values and communication speed to max speed of modem If modem is used supporting communication speed of more than 56kbps set communication speed of Cnet I F module to 38400bps as of max speed 4 29 Chapter 4 Performance specification 3 White basic parameters and change communication in Online connection of Frame Editor to switch RS 232C channel over to communication run Write untitled frm 4 If switched to communication run operation setting of Cnet I F module is completed and the setting contents are saved in flash memory of the module as reserved even if powered off 5 If setting of the module is completed with all the items above input initialize modem by powering PLC and dial up modem OFF and then ON again If modem is init
253. s shown in Figure 8 20 Figure 8 20 Communication protocol of temperature controller A Write request frame B Read request frame seu pauyep PsN PUD VJO TO uogas ejs C Response frame A Write aa frame Cnets request Write data of 12 channels in temperature controller a DLE STX TENER Iwon BCC calculation range P A o mem B Read request frame Cnets request Read temperature value of 12 channels in her controller number Cm oem a e u oa mem BCC calculation range Chapter 8 Exercising program C Read response frame Tempete controller s response sends temperature value of 12 channels EE e ae ee BCC calculation range meron Communication protocol in Figure 8 20 is a protocol for HEX communication with data areas all in HEX except header and tail Communication frame is described next Q Header Indicates start of frame with DLE STX in request frame and continuous control characters of DLE J ACK in response frame Q Tail Indicates end of frame with DLE ETX in request frame and continuous control characters of DLE EOT in response frame Q Device ID Means temperature controller No with 01 used in L Command Dependent on Read Write commands 01 for Write and 02 for Read command Q Address Memory address of temperature controller Q Channel number I O channels number of temperature controlle
254. se after GM_WR frame Is sent execute RCV MSG Function Block if GM WR_ ACK frame is received with RCVO_ 232 1 flag turned ON among received flags in RS 232C channel TX data is saved in SD1 area of SND_MSG Function Block while 40 bytes data in variable area of SD_SAVE is transmitted as in Figure 8 7 Chapter 8 Exercising program Next is setting screen of SD SAVE variables Memory of 41bytes is allocated to MB140 address starting Data size of TX variable shall be set at least identical to the data size to be sent Add Edit Variables Figure 8 8 shows Function Block program for transmission of Read data Figure 8 8 Function Block to read data TX request flag of Read request frame Flag monitoring the receiving of Read __ response frame Function Block for receiving of response same _ to Read request Function Block for 7 Read request TX Chapter 8 Exercising program In Figure 8 8 Read is requested via SND_ MSG Function Block to read data and to respond to this 20 bytes data is sent to GM RD ACK frame from dedicated slave station If GM RD ACK frame is received _RCVO0_232 3 is ON to execute RCV_MSG Function Block and save the received data to RD SAVE area set to RX data variable Memory for RD_SAVE is allocated to MBO area as below and data size shall be set at least identical to the size of the received data Next is variable setting screen of RD SAVE which is a saving varia
255. sed and pushed again after pushed once transmission specifications are displayed on LED At this time because No 15 LED becomes Off user can know that it is indicating transmission specifications Transmission specifications are separately indicated according to RS 232C channel and RS 422 channel as below table LED No Indication contents Communication speed of d1 RS 232C channel Binary valuelNotel d2 300 38400 bps d1 2 Even Odd Parity On Even Off Odd On 2Bit Off 18 Data Bit On 8Bit Off 7Bit Parity Being None On Being Off None Off during transmission specifications indication Communication speed of 300 76800 bps Le Stop Bit On 2Bit Off 1Bit Off during transmission specifications indication Transmission speed is converted from 3 Bit values of d0 d2 to HEX of which value is shown as below table see below table But 76800 bps is provided in RS 422 and is available in Ver 1 3 or later version of Cnet I F module LED lighting indication a o e an mows A 4 Appendix A 1 3 LED indication specifications during abnormal operation LED operations if abnormal are divided into two cases 1 When in state of SYS ERROR LED Off the communication error LED flashes at intervals it means that installation of communication cable or basic parameter setting is abnormal At this time it can be solved by seeing chapter 11 Troubleshooting 2 When serious H W error occ
256. selected at user s option Max 8 control characters are allowed for use as continued Header shall be surely set bound up with T and 1 like ENQ The following example is for header setting Header STXICRILFIIDCS Header IsTx Header E E Frame body setting Frame body is used for area setting to which actual data including commands are to be transmitted For sorting out these setting according to max 8 segments is available in Frame Editor To input per segmentis to sort constantly transmitted data area CONST from variable data area ARRAY Since CONST area and ARRAY area may be used as mixed setting shall be performed as agreed with those respectively in several segments Segments shall be applied from No 1 as in transmission sequence of frames Do not insert a segment unused in the middle Chapter 5 Frame Editor Q CONST Set data which is constant with invariable features to Constant Fixed area like command or Station number of frame is applicable for this CONST data shall be set as classified into HEX or ASCII with max 30 byte available Q ARRAY Variable area which is changeable data whose contents are variable like TX RX data is applicable for this If set to ARRAY TX RX data is meant to be changeable based on frame thus specified number of data can be transmitted and received by setting the number of data The size set in ARRAY size area shall be the same as the actual number of data to be transmitted a
257. shed by once For distinguishing LED indications of station No and transmission specifications No 15 LED is used When indicating Station No No 15 LED becomes On when indicating transmission specifications it becomes Off and the remaining LED indicates transmission specifications LED for station No indication with display switch pushed once IfLED display switch is pushed once No 15 LED becomes On as below table LEDs of No 0 4 indicate the station No for RS 232C channel and LEDs of No 8 12 indicate the station No for RS 422 channel in binary value LED No Indication contents Range 0 31 of RS 232C channel station No indication Not used Off during station No indication Range 0 31 of RS 422 se channel station No indication Not used Off during station No indication Station No can be recognized by converting binary to HEXdecimal Value Notet Station No can be recognized by converting binary to HEXdecimal Value Notet ee On during station No indication Note1 Example of station No calculation Q Station No calculation if LEDs of No DO D1 D4D are ON 2 21424 1 2416 19 Q Station No calculation if LEDs of No D1 D3 are ON 2 23 2 48 10 Note2 Function of station No indication isn t supported separately for GM7 A 3 Appendix LED fortransmission specifications indication with display switch pushed twice If LED display switch is relea
258. sion modem 3 IfRTS control is set to ON compulsorily always ON operated 2 ON always normally 4 If RTS control is set to EIA control it shall flash along with TXD LED to be normal 2 ON always normally 5 If RTS control is set to EIA control it shall flash along with TXD LED to be normal 1 Check if module is set to dedicated modem mode ON always 2 Check status of cable connection between module and dedicated modem 1 Check if module is set to dedicated modem mode ON always 2 Check status of cable connection between module and dedicated modem 1 Check status of dedicated line 2 Check connection status of dedicated line 1 Check if RTS LED flashes CTS will flash only if RTS flashes 2 Shoot the trouble of RTS LED to let RTS flash 1 Flash if in 3 Check cable connection between module and dedicated transmission modem CTS l 4 IfRTS control is setto ON compulsorily always ON operated 4 26 Chapter 4 Performance specification 4 4 2 Connection to dial up modem RS 232C Cnet I F module has a function for long distance communication using public line This function allows the long distance communication by connecting external modem to module in PC or remote devices equipped with telephoning function via public line In connection of dial up modem and Cnet I F module not equipped with telephoning function connection shall be performed by telephoning via external modem linked with this module in PC or externa
259. ster slave communication system with dedicated modem configured as in Figure 8 1 through GLOFA Cnet I F module higher TM master on which 8 Cnet I F modules are mounted performs data communication with 8 lower TM slave stations via dedicated modem TM master uses GM2 CPU and TM slave uses GM4 CPU And in this system Cnet I F module of slot No 0 7 in TM master inputs and outputs data through dedicated modem communication with 8 stations of slave station No 0 Figure 8 1 TM TC dedicated modem system E E E E nu n a LLLI ELLI CIELI ETILI CITIJ ELIT LELTI Dedicated Dedicated Dedicated Dedicated Dedicdted Dedicdted Dedicdted Dedicated Modem dodem mofem modem mode moder modem modem TL Slave 7 Dedicated modem ooo Slave 5 Dedicated modem Slave 6 Dedicated modem ELET Slave 1 Dedicated modem Slave 2 Dedicated modem Slave 0 Dedicated modem Slave Dedicated modem Slave 4 Dedicated modem Table 8 1 describes TX RX data mapping between TM master station and 8 slave stations In master station as shown in Table 8 1 20 bytes data from MBO area Is written to MB200 area of slave station and 50 bytes data from MB100 area of slave station is saved in starting MB400 area of master station TX RX areas of slave stations are all the same in 8 stations and TX RX area of master station is specified to Offset as much as the size of TX RX data Chapter 8 Exercising program Table 8 1
260. t be decided in PLC program for receiving data Receiving flag indicating receiving time of data has a function to receive the required data as sorted out when various receiving frames are applied as registered The receiving flag displays 3 data of RS 232C RS 422 channel data frame entry number and slot number of Cnet I F module altogether The receiving flag is turned ON if the applicable data is received and turned OFF if the received frame is being read via RCV_MSG Function Block Table 7 4 describes the details of the receiving flag Chapter 7 Communication function Table7 4 Description of the receiving flag x x 0 7 Selects slot number of Cnet I F module available to be set from 0 up to 7 232 Specifies RS 232C channel _RCVx_232 i Specifies RS 422C channel l This is the entry number of the receiving frame registered in Frame Editor RCVx_422 i Desired frame among the receiving frames registered from 0 up to 63 can be selected Note 1 Receiving flag can be used only in Cnetl F module O S Ver 1 1 or more 4 Error codes If error occurs as the result of execution of Function Block ERR output is On and error code information is displayed on STATUS STATUS output is maintained only for one SCAN Error codes for various cases are described in Table 7 5 Table 7 5 User defined error codes STATUS value meee escription Cnet I F module is incorrectly positioned 20 1 Incorrect
261. tation requests data in order to If master station requests data respond normally without data loss in continuously without waiting for the Slave stations 2 response of slave station thus parts of the request frames are lost in slave stations normal response to No 3 4 or 6 frame is impossible with data abandoned 7 103 Chapter 7 Communication function v In RS 422 485 communication system especially linked with many slave stations as in Ex 1 since transmission channels of slave stations are connected to receiving channel of master station via one line normal transmission receiving of data is impossible if orderly communication is not performed Thus surely prepare the program for master station to request orderly transmission receiving of data Figure 7 19 describes the case that data crash occurs in multi drop communication system Because TX RX lines of communication devices applied in communication share one communication cable as in the figure normal communication can t be performed due to data crash if simultaneous transmission is applied by several Stations Figure 7 19 shows an example of data crash in communication line when transmission is applied by slave stations 2 amp 3 ata time Figure 7 19 Data crash in multi drop system Data crash Neel frame 3 S SF esposefiame2 SL Req Ke Reet A pa Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3 Slave 4 a Data crash in RS 485 system 7
262. te connection with GMWIN via odem public line telephone line using dial up modem RS 232C For communication with local PC or external devices as connected with Null modem cable directly within 15m Dedicated modem For line dedicated communication using dedicated modem eas For 1 N communication of full duplex type with external devices within 500m RS 422 ae For multi drop communication of half duplex type with external devices within 500m 4 12 Chapter 4 Performance specification 5 Enter station No for dedicated mode or other company s dedicated mode Station No can be set from 0 to 31 6 Set the other basic parameters communication speed data bit parity and stop bit in accordance with the communication type 7 If parameters have been set write according to channels First connect GMWIN cable between CPU of PLC and ee Remark Notel GMWIN cable shall be connected between RS 232C port of PLC CPU and PC If linked with RS 232C port of Cnet I F module the connection via Frame Editor isn t available 8 Select Option port in Frame Editor to display the dialog box below Continuously select serial port of PC side connected with GMWIN cable and click on the OK button COM Port Selection 9 Select Online Connect to connect with PLC If the screen below is displayed the connection is completed If the connection failed two causes are expected as follows 4 13 Chapter 4 Perform
263. ted Q Character protocol Start Stop Data P arity setting available using Frame Editor Q Communication speed 300 38400 BPS available Q Channel operation Stand alone Interlocking operation available for RS 232C RS 422 channels Q Communication mode HEX communication Q Frame check BCC 1 byte complementof double the sum data except for message start end symbols Q Station No area 0 31 station available Q Command supported AB PLC 5 commands set compliant Q Max data length 110 bytes 7 117 Chapter 7 Communication function 2 Cnet supported control code Table 7 27 Control code for AB Asynchronous Link service Syrto Type 3 Cnetsupported PLC 5 Family Command Cnets AB Asynchronous Link communication driver supports 4 AB PLC 5 commands among PLC 5 commands necessary for communication with GLOFA PLC The following table describes the commands supported in Cnet AB Asynchronous Link communication driver Table7 28 Cnet I F module supported PLC 5 Command set wordwiterange o o Back Word data wting oiegresicstus o o setdagnossradng Other commands than described in Table7 28 shall not be used as not responded in Cnet I F module 4 Response status code to commands If the response is in error Cnet I F module sends error response and transmits error code to EXT STS area Table7 29 shows error codes in error response Table7 29 Error codes in AB Asynchronous Link STS Code EXT STS Co
264. tem to decide to adopt complementof 1 or 2 or not to BCC creation value If mask has been set after adoption of complement let it masked to random value user has set Set random value used in mask and masking method Ex 1 When masking with random value HFF by XOR method FF a Ex 2 When masking with random value HFF by OR method FF Ex 3 When masking with random value HFF by AND method amp FF X Keyboard position of setting characters of mask method gt gt Framesize g f XOR 1 BCC method is exclusive OR EXCLUSIVE OR ASCII communication Max 126 byte HEX communication Max 256 byte 7 32 Chapter 7 Communication function gt Flag _RCV n n means frame list number indicates that user defined frame is received per setting number as Of boolean type with size of 16 in array form If received frame is agreed with No 3 frame list RCV 3 is blinking 0 gt 1 0 gt After frame is received GM7 basic unit checks if any is agreed with received frame in its frame list If the frame is in existence applicable address of RCV n flag is blinked and if received data Is in existence it is saved in the applicable area 2 Function Block A SND_MSG Function Block Executes Function Block at 1 rising edge SND_MSG Field number of frame list to transmit RE ND FL_ ER ID If executed without error 1 is output as kept until next STAT US Function Block is called
265. tems Static electric discharging Voltage 4kV contactdischarging IEC 61131 2 1EC 1000 4 2 Radiation electromagnetic field noise 27 500MHz 10 V m IEC 61131 2 IEC 1000 4 3 2 3 5 7 Noise proof Digital Digital 1 0 Fast Power I O PEOI SEMEN iguel GaV or Analog 1 0 IEC 61131 2 Transient burst communication IEC 1000 4 4 noise more voe aw aw a No corrosive gas or dust conditions Operating height 2000m or less 4 Ambient 10 Pollution level 2 orless Cooling type Natural air cooling Remark Notel lEC International Electrotechnical Commission International non governmental organization which promote international cooperation establish international standard and administer valuation system to its suitableness for international standards of electric and electronic tech fields Note2 Pollution level An index indicating pollution level of the operating environment which decides insulation performance of the devices For instance Pollution level 2 indicates the state generally that only non conductive pollution occurs However this state contains temporary conduction due to condensing 3 1 Chapter 3 Product specification 3 2 Performance specifications Table 3 2 Performance specification Specification Remark Serial communication RS 232C channel RS 232C standards conformed GM3 4 6 7 channel RS 422 485 channellNotet RS 422 485 standards conformed GM3 4 6 7 Modem connection Remote comm
266. tion Error contents Error code 1 11 Error code 5 7 Table 11 2 Communication command operation abnormal Refer to Appendix LED indication during abnormal operation Error code Error indication Error contents Error contact of GMWIN function block User defined function block error becomes On ERR 3 command for user defined communi cation or NDR of communication command dose not become becomes On and Status value is not0 ibe Table 11 3 Error during RX monitor operation of frame editor Error code Error indication Error contents No received data message occurs from Incorrect frame definiton by frame editor or ERR 4 the beginning during requesting of RX disagreement between communication command and monitor start frame or incorrectly connected cable Monitor data is not correctly received Bad cable connection or disagreement of basic ERR 5 on during RX monitor operation parameters between communication stations Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Table 11 4 Error during TX monitor operation of frame editor Error code Error indication Error contents Incorrect frame definition by frame editor or No sent data message occurs from the disagreement between communication command and beginning during requesting of TX moni tor frame or incorrectly connected cable Bad connection Start with communication module CPU or communication module error e Bad cable connection e Disagreement o
267. tion Initial running and flash memory managing functions Saving CPU O S l CPU ROM CPU ROM location Using GMWIN s I O information function TC CPU ROM change CPU ROM change Execution of all other functions than initial running Saving FLASH O S Flash memory N A location er 2 Using Frame Editor Using Frame E ditor upgrade by S W Remark Note1 Cnet I F module versions are classified as based on CPU O S Ver Namely functions for Ver 2 0 or later mean that CPU O S is of Ver 2 0 or later Note2 Since modules of Ver 1 7 or less have CPU O S only O S upgrade via flash memory is unavailable 1 3 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 CPU O S Ver check Cnet Ver 2 0 performs the most basic functions for initial running and flash memory operation and Ver 1 7 or less performs all functions of Cnet CPU O S can be upgraded only by CPU change of Cnet I F module Versions of Cnet I F modules are classified on the basis of CPU O S with the following procedure for version check A If I O info selected after GMWIN Online connection I O information dialog box is displayed as below Base O1 0 Palnformation B If applicable base is selected from I O information dialog box slot number in bold is displayed as a menu available to select for communication module and special module Click equivalent slot number to GLOFA Cnet to display the dialog box as in Figure 1 1 The succeeding figure to V in Vx x indicates the version
268. tion programming either because it operates as a dedicated mode slave Data memory mapping Is all identical for communication of Cnet 1 2 3 stations thus the same program may be shared in those 3 stations Next is how to prepare the program in station 1 A Dedicated communication protocol to be used Cnet station 1 shall prepare frame in user defined mode for communication through dedicated communication protocol of Cnet station 4 Use continuous reading writing commands of direct variables in dedicated communication protocol to allow communication between station 1 and Station 4 through TX RX map between Cnet I F modules in Table 8 3 Next is for protocol of dedicated communication slave to communicate through the map in Table 8 3 Refer to 7 2 in this manual for details Chapter 8 Exercising program Continuous writing request of direct variables writing 40 bytes to MB100 of station 4 Ciassiicaton Header ee Command Variable Variable Number Tal length name of data 40 gm Frame ENQ MB100 Response format to continuous writing request of direct variables ACK response clasifcaon Staton No Command Tah ecc 7 ERNEEE EEE Continuous reading request of direct variables reading 20 bytes from MBO of station 4 Classification Header ee Command EEE MEE Tail EvS Name of data EErEE MBO eta See to continuous reading request of direct variables ACK ee st tion Number Number 20 bytes Frame ACK H04 rS
269. to ARRAY type its related area shall be set in byte even though word type of data is declared in CONST type Ex 2 l0RSB06 MW10006 is execution frame of reading 6 word data via dedicated protocol communication from MW100 in 16 slave station At this time saving area to save the read data shall be set to ARRAY with its size set to 6 words namely 12 byte Radio button to select input type of command with 2 types of HEX amp ASCII Ex ASCI 10RSBO06 MW100 Ex 2 HEX 313052 53 42 30 36 25 57 44 31 30 30 Checking item to decide transmission of data by ASCII converting in transmission frame or receiving of data by HEX converting in receiving frame if set to ARRAY variable data area If set to ARRAY variable data area area size is set in byte unit Unit is byte 7 29 Chapter 7 Communication function 7 30 Chapter 7 Communication function gt Tall Use the form of Tail Whatis available for Tail is 1 English character 1 figure or NUL H00 STX H02 ETX H03 EOT HO4 ACK H06 NAK H15 SOH HO1 ENQ H05 BEL HO7 BS HO8 HT H09 LF HOA VT HOB FF HOC CR HOD SO HOE SI HOF DLE H10 DC1 H11 DC2 H12 DC3 H13 DC4 H14 SYN H16 ETB H17 CAN H18 EM H19 SUB H1A ESC H1B FS H1C GS H1D RS H1E US H1F DE
270. to Write frame MASTER K 1000H sends the response frame below RX frame to receive this is defined as below Set frame name to MK_ACK and enter 05w of RX frame CONST data for station No and command RX frame has no data thus no need to set ARRAY segment Set BCC behind the tail to let BCC checked Since BCC uses lower case command in Cnet s request frame let BCC checked in all TX RX frames Frame Name JMK_ACK Tx Aix Header ACK Immediate Response Type CONST oSv Type NONE i HEX ASCII i f d f Segment Segmente Type NONE Type NONE x i li Segment 3 woe maer om p Segment 7 Type NONE Type NONE l ES gt Segment 4 ata mo a i Segment _ EN Type NONE Type NONE z Cancel i i H g f f f li I 1 H Tail EOT BCC BCC Setting Chapter 8 Exercising program C BCC checking BCC sends receives HEX data sum from station No to tail with ASCII converted result attached to the tail BCC setting is as follows BCC Setting D Frame download Download the prepared frame and basic parameters as above to Cnet I F module and run RS 232C channel to complete basic setting for Cnet I F module Subsequently prepare PLC program through GMWIN program Chapter 8 Exercising program 4 GMWIN programming After frame edit and download are completed prepa
271. to types of frames F igure5 2 shows the main screen when 3 frames are registered Frame edit screen is composed of two screens for frame list and frame information Frame list displays registered frame names and registration No and frame information displays Summarized information for selected frames Figure 5 2 Registration screen of frames Frame type can be set for transmission and receiving Figure5 3 describes how to register frames with 3 examples of frame registration 1 Transmitted frame setting SEND Figure 5 2 describes how to register SEND frame as of No 1 transmitted frame in frame list No 1 frame is supposed to be transmitted frame in the structure as below Trans Header sequence l q Tail Frame body Frame type Header Tail BCC Command CONST Data ARRAY trans trame eno o o w B 4 EQ eov Chapter 5 Frame Editor Q Transmission sequence means sequence of such data transmitted in serial communication as Header Constant Array Tail and BCC in order Q Frame type according to method when transmitted frame is registered in Frame Editor is divided usually into header tail and frame body Q Header and tail are used to tell the start from the end of frame mainly with special characters Occasionally header and tail are not provided for some protocols however they are recommended to use for reliable communication along with special codes like STX EOT and ETX Q Frame bod
272. tor Flash Flash once continuously initially in a cycle of 1 second Flash if in Transmission No flash No flash 4 32 Flash if in receiving Check cable connection between module and modem Reset modem initializing command referring to modem manual Tx Rx LEDs shall initially flash once to be normal Check cable connection between module and modem If in user mode check setting of PLC program and frame If in dedicated mode check setting of station No Check if phone line is connected to line terminal of modem Check status of public line Check if data is transmitted from the other station s modem Check cable connection between module and modem if RX LED of modem flashes while LED of module doesn t flash Chapter 4 Performance specification LED type If abnormal Action to take 1 Check cable connection ERROR FF Flash s ia Check if modem is deficient Download communication type of RS 232C channel as set to modem via Frame Editor Check if channel operation mode is set to stand alone mode 2 LED display amp Troubleshooting for dial up modem Since LED specification for dial up modem differs according to makers user s manual for modem shall be referred to Table4 7 describes how to troubleshoot in dial up modem based on common specification of LED display Table4 9 Checklist for dial up module s LED 2 Check if data is transmitted from the other station s modem 1 If
273. tout areas of 5 cards from output card P00 of MASTER K 1000H Figure 8 14 Communication system between GLOFA PLC and MASTER K PLC GLOFA PLC MASTER K1000H RS 232C interface 8 5 1 Exercising program Cnet I F module operates as a master station in user defined mode and writes data to MASTER K 1000H via CPU port of MASTER K 1000H PLC through dedicated protocol and WORD WRITE command among MASTER K dedicated communication protocols while MASTER K 1000H operated as a slave station processes Write data request of GLOFA Cnet to respond to the following result in the structure as shown in Figure 8 14 Prepare frame and GMWIN program for this after setting of Cnet I F module mode and basic setting items 1 Setting items As in communication via RS 232C channel of Cnet I F module set operation mode and basic parameters for RS 232C channel Table 8 8 describes setting Items of Cnet Table 8 8 Setting items of Cnet I F module RS 232C channel setting item Setting contents Operation mode Mode 2 user defined mode RS 422 channel not used RS 232C station No Basic value Not used Communication speed and basic Communication type Null modem communication spec shall be as 9600 BPS DATA 8 bits specified in spec of MASTER K 1000H RS 232C basic parameters _ ISTART 1 bit STOP 1 bit communication Chapter 8 Exercising program 2 Communication cable connection and basic setting Connect Cnet with computer communication port i
274. transmitted to Function Block FNAM STRING Note1 RDX x 1 2 3 4 Specifies one of RS 232C channel RS 422channel in Cnet I F module to perform this service 1 CH 0 transmitted to RS 232C side 2 CH 1 transmitted to RS 422 side As set via Frame Editor it displays frame name with up to 16 characters to be received by this Function Block among downloaded frames via Cnet I F module USINT Array is an input variable specifying the area of received data for segment set to ARRAY in receiving frame Same number of RD areas shall be specified as the number of ARRAY segments Figures 1 2 3 4 behind RD mean sequence of segments set to ARRAY and areas for direct variables or indirect variables of PLC of Unsigned Short Integer Array can be specified ARRAY number of RDx shall be at least the same as the ARRAY number set in Frame Editor Even if there is no data to be received in other words no segment set to ARRAY in Frame Editor RD values shall be input as automatic variables If input value is not set compile error is expected output Data type Be turned On after Function Block service is finished without error as kept On until the next Function Block is called Chapter 7 Communication function output bata type Turned On when the Function Block is called but not executed successfully and keeps ERR BOOL On until re called If error occurs error information is displayed on output STATUS If ERR is 1 as the result o
275. ule Max 256 Byte Header Station Command Tail Frame check Command Structured data area ENQ No type EOT BCC B ACK Response frame Cnetl F module gt External communication devices if data is received normally Max 256 Byte Header Station Command Tail Frame check Command structured data area or NULL ACK No type ETX BCC C NAK Response frame Cnetl F module External communication devices if data is received abnormally Header Station Command Tail Frame check Command Error code ASCII 4 byte NAK No type ETX BCC D Control codes of dedicated communication Table7 10 shows arranged control codes used as Header amp Tail of frame in dedicated communication as arranged Other control codes than those are not used Table7 10 ASCII control characters HEX value Abbreviation ENQ Header Startcode of request frame ACK Header Hog Acknowledge Startcode of ACK response frame NAK Header Not Acknowledge Startcode of NAK response frame EOT Tail O a End of Text End ASCII code of requestframe ETX Tail O 03 End Text End ASCII code of response frame 7 36 Chapter 7 Communication function Remark Note1 Figure data of all frames is of ASCII code to HEX figure unless specified additionally What are displayed in HEX figures are shown in the list below 1 Station No Be careful that station No is set in decimal figure in Frame Editor but is displayed in HEX figure in dedicate
276. ule has a path specified for operation according to PLC mode P I P rogram Invocation is an execution program object that has the start condition and status at start up stop and temporary stop of user program PI is created deleted by user and PLC can be controlled by PI name a 7 14 Relation between P and PLC control PI DEVELOPING a PI DELETE y PI START PI RESET PI STOP PIRESUME List of commands to change operation status of PLC into PI command is as follows Table 7 21 PI related commands PI stop MSN D Temporarily stops at run status MPN D Completely stops at temporary stop status PI delete MDN D Deletes the created object v Pl create and P delete of commands above are specially used in system so don t use them at ordinary times N in command type specifies PI name to execute PI command and D in parentheses execute PI name with default value Therefore when D is used don t specify P name 1 75 Chapter 7 Communication function 1 Request format PC gt PLC P N NAM Header Station No Command Comman PI N LEN aiz Tail Steti type J E check ame x i ASCII value H3130 H4D 6D H524E H3034 H4C474953 a P N_LEN is where the number of PI name s characters is displayed PI N_NAME is where PI name is displayed When PI name is executed as specified the max number of characters is 16 A SN S If no name is required use D instead of N in command type IfD has been used PIN
277. unication Note2 with external devices is available via public function telephone line by connecting external modem to the module GM3 4 6 7 Supporting multi drop 1 1 communication wit dedicated protocol of LG Industrial Systems GMWIN mode PLC remote control IS available through Operating mode GMWIN connection function Operating mode can be set by operating E E EEA Operated by user defined protocol y 7 inet for other company s interface channels respe ctively Dedicated mode GM3 4 6 7 GM3 4 6 7 GM3 4 6 7 On line mode Set by software when editing frame without change of the mode switch GM 3 4 6 Other company s InterfacelNote3 with other companies such Dedicated Mode as Modbus and A B DF1 Data a With Frame Editor basic parameter can be ype SPB selected GM7is setin GMWIN munication meter F ven Odd None communication parameter Stand alone interlocking channels can be selected by operating mode switch Notes GM3 4 6 Set in GMWIN communication parameter Synchronization type Asynchronous type GM3 4 6 7 Any speed of 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 Transmission 76800bps can be selected Notes speed bps Any speed of 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600bps can be GM7 selected Notes Setting with Frame Editor GM7 is setin GMWIN communication parameter Station No setting is available up to 32 stations from 0 to 31 valid only if operating mode is in GM3 4 6 7
278. unication program prepared by dedicated Function Block GM RD and GM _WR Function Blocks are so prepared as to be executed in order via interlock program and in a cycle of 1 second through 1 sec timer to prevent communication overload Figure 7 17 Dedicated Function Block program REAL RD START TiS 2 F Bs are executed in a cycle of 1 sec GH T q jP successi imep_ R IRITE IRSTAT TIS EH einer I su j 0 SLOT EFR 1 CH Stari NO LS HOWE OEN ENO CH STATE 3 STN US I B OUT WRSTART O INi OUT PE SHEIOO YAR LEN Dn k DATA WBO DATA o LEN AD IRITE ER OUT ROSTAT 0 DATA Table 7 24 describes I O setting values of Function Block in program of Figure 7 17 Table 7 24 I O variable setting of Function Block GM_RD GM WR After GM_WR FB operation is completed let it REO Started After GM_RD FB operation is completed let it Set RD START variable s initial value to 1 so started for preparing start condition at first scan SLOT NO 0 Inputslot No where LOCAL Cnet I F module is mounted on 1 RS 422 channel ST NO 2 Other s station No 3 Other s station No MB100 Area of the other station to read o VAR a MB200 Area of the other station to write in DATA LEN 10 Data number to read BYTE 40 Data number to write BYTE DATA MBO RX data area of master station MB20 TX data area of master station 7 101 Chapter 7 C
279. urs No 15 LED SYS ERROR flashes in period of 1 sec and the error state is indicated by LED No 0 3 When serious H W failure occurs the various errors are indicated by LED No 0 3 of which LED No 0 is lower Bit d0 LED No 3 is upper Bit d3 and these vallues are converted from binary into decimal values to indicate error code Table A 4 Error codes during serious failure occurence Error codelotel Error contents Remark Internal memory diagnosis error Common use memory reading writing error Common use memory access error H W error PLC CPU interface stop Ps want s 16550 access enor o e Reseed tse pg dessert Other ero If an error code is indicated except error codes of No 5 amp 7 Cnet I F module is seriously damaged Contact our company s service Station to solve the problem For errors of No 5 amp 7 refer to chapter 11 Troubleshooting Remark Note1 If in serious failure SYS ERROR LED flashes in period of 1 sec and the error code is indicated by LED No 0 3 Example of error code calculation is as below Q If LED No 0 1 2 are ON error code value calculation 2 2 22 14 2 4 7 Q If LED No 1 3 are ON error code value calculation 2 23 2 8 10 A 5 Appendix A 1 4 LED indication specification during power on This module performs self diagnosis through self H W check and CPU and interface of PLC When selfand PLC CPU interface checks are OK after LED 0
280. ust be within 1 sec P p 1 Request format PC gt PLC Station No rame Ex EON uN PU ASCII value H3130 _H50 70 H554E 44 H3035 H4C47504C43 Lao l v DM_LEN displays the number of Domain name s characters in the range of H01 H10 v DM_ NAME displays Domain name which is allocated when saved to PLC If the name is unknown use P_Domain v IfD has been used instead of N in command type DM_LEN and DM_NAME are unnecessary v fno name is required use D instead of N in command type v BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC and sent v When uploading the extension name of the file to be uploaded saved shall be BNO for GK ROM 7 89 Chapter 7 Communication function 2 Response format for PLC of ACK response Station DOMAIN SIZE Header Command Command type Tail Frame check Frame value H01 P p UN D 00001298 ETX BCC a omw ASCII value H3031 H50 70 H554E 44 H3030303031323938 v DOMAIN_SIZE means the size of the domain saved in PLC This size is of ASCII code converted from decimal Station number commands and type of command are the same as in computer request format BCC When command is one of lower case p only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted into ASCII added to BCC
281. value Remark Note 1 Data type of variable to be read is specified in command type For the details see Table 7 13 and Table 7 14 BCC When command is one of lower case r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ENQ to EOT is converted into ASCII and added to BCC 7 51 Chapter 7 Communication function v Number of blocks This specifies the number of the blocks composed of Directvariable name Direct variable in this request format This can be set up to 4 blocks Therefore the value of Number of blocks 3 must be HOL ASCII value 3031 H04 ASCII value 3034 v Variable name length This indicates the number of name s characters registered in access variable of PLC which is allowable up to 16 characters This value is one of ASCII converted from HEX type and the range Is from HO1 ASCIl value 3031 to H10 ASCII value 3130 v Variable name This is a name of variable to be read actually in ASCII value within 16 characters Others than figure upper lower cases and are not allowed for variable name Upper lower cases are separately used but all access variable names of PLC are composed of upper cases Therfore use upper cases only Remark Note 1 Device data type of each block must be same Namely since data type of variable in each block is determined by data type of all variables of 4 blocks must be the ones of the data type specified b
282. value Not used channel of Cnet WV Communication Not used Stations 1 2 3 19200bps shall be set speed identical Data Stop Data 8 S tart paa Starta stop1 1 Chapter 8 Exercising program Setting item Cnet on fixed body Cnet on mobile body Operation o o a mode Dedicated communication Dedicated communication Communication parameters shall Q Station No Set 1 2 3 stations in order Station 4 l be agreed with x Communi 19200 BPS 19200 BPS monitoring Data otop Data 8 Start 1 Stop 1 Data 8 Start 1 Stop 1 Svice Remark Note1 If module Ver 2 0 is used set RS 232C channel to dedicated mode for dedicated master mode service so to simplify programming Refer to 7 3 Dedicated communication master in the manual for programming procedure Table 8 4 describes setting items of the module Communication method and specification shall be set identical also for monitoring device and optical modem Refer to user s manual of the applied product for setting of optical modem and monitoring device 3 Programming GMWIN program shall be prepared for user defined communication via RS 232C channel of Cnet stations 1 2 3 in system of Figure 8 4 and frame for communication via dedicated communication protocol shall be also prepared in Frame Editor RS 422 channel of Cnet 1 2 3 stations needs no additional communication programming because the monitoring device operates as a master station Cnet station 4 needs no communica
283. without PLC programming by setting of the next transmitted frame because REPLY frame has been set to immediate response frame of RECEIVE frame Trans sequence Header lt Frame body Frame type Header Commandiconst Double click on frame No 3 area in frame list of Figure 5 2 to register transmitted frame REPLY Registration procedure is same as in SEND frame and Registration result is as below 5 21 Chapter 5 Frame Editor SE ee ne EL Se Se Se Te Se Ee ae ey En ae en Eee yy ie a een meen Frame Name REPLY Oe Header DLE Segment i ee LRA RT rhe ee eis ss ee Type CONST I RCv_oK t HEA f ASCII i Segment 2 Se A Segment 3 Type NONE Type NONE ETXIBCC Tail r Segment 5 _ Segment 6 BCC Setting Cancel a Type NONE bel Type NONE be Segment f Type NONE Le Type tials SRS We Pe AAH ee 4 Frame information If frame in frame list is once clicked after frame registration frame information screen is displayed on the right introducing information briefly about the frame selected Frame information provides TX RX type header tail type BCC setting and also the number of CONST and ARRAY per segment Next figure shows SEND frame information registered via transmitted frame Frame List Tx Rx Send G1 constant SG array G3 null G4 null Tailer EOT BCC 5 22
284. xecution of command Header Station No Command Comman a Tall eens a T EJ frame E x ef tf a TNN For PLC NAK response after execution of command Command Frame Header Station No Command Error code Tail EE E Frame Ex u fon a m l 7 58 Chapter 7 Communication function CJ Individual writing of direct variables WSS This is a function to write PLC device memory directly specified in accord with memory data type Separate device memories can be written up to 4 ata time 1 Request format PC gt PLC N Station Command meet Variable Variable Header Command No type name frame Ex MW10 ENQ H20 W w SS H01 H 0 i H254D5 H05 H3230 H57 77 H5353 H3031 H3036 731303 0 lblock Setting can be repeated up to 4 blocks v BCC When command is one of lower case w only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ENQ to EOT is converted into ASCII and added to BCC v Number of blocks This specifies the number of the blocks composed of Variable length Variable name in this request format This can be set up to 4 blocks Therefore the value of Number of blocks must be HO1 ASCIl value 3031 H04 ASCII value 3034 v Variable length name length of directvariable This indicates the number of name s characters that means direct variable which is allowable up to 16 characters This value is one of ASCII converted from HEX type and the range is from HO1 AS
285. y HH Note 2 If specifies array data only 1 block is allowed Note 3 The number of elements means the number of the elements in array Namely if global array variable XX IS Specified up to array 0 5 the number of elements becomes H06 2 Response Format for PLC ACK response A For command type of non array West Station eae Command Number of Number of type blocks data No H10 R r H02 H01 H02 H23A0 Repeated block H313 H323341 H52 72 H3032 H3031 H3032 m 0 1 block M ax 4 blocks Frame ACK Ex ASCII H06 value 7 52 Chapter 7 Communication function B For command type of array Comman Station Com Number Number of Frame Header d Tail mand of blocks data check type Frame H23A0112233445566778899 ACK H10 R r ETX BCC AABBCCDDEEFF001122 H3233413031313232333334 ASCII H313 H52 343535363637373838393941 H3137 H3031 H3134 value 72 414242434344444545464630 3031313232 Note 1 If response format from PLC when data type of array variable is WORD and variable s name and element number is OUTPUT ARR 0 9 is as above the number of data is the element number data 2 20 H14 Bytes Station number commands type of command and number of blocks are the same as in computer request format v BCC When command Is one of lower case r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 byte each to ASCII values from ACK to ETX is converted i
286. y Other errors when changing operation mode 2 Execute PI creation in state of Pl 2 Execute after P deleted 2 PI created already created already A 9 Appendix Acton to ke 4201 Present operation mode RUN 4142 4200 4242 4342 4442 0090 0190 0290 No response Operation mode change error Download initialization error Domain Delete impossible Upload initialization error Down upload sequence error Down upload initialization error Monitor execution error Monitor execution error Monitor registration error No response 4202 Present operation mode STOP 4203 Present operation mode PAUSE 4204 Present operation mode Debug When downloading with Domain not deleted When executing Domain Delete with PI not deleted Domain not downloaded Domain name mismatch Frame number mismatch Initialization command not executed Registration number of appropriate monitor not registered Registered number exceeding range Registered number exceeding range Station No error BCC error Main command command type error Header and tail character error Cable error Operation mode error Communication speed stop data parity biterror PLC error A 10 Execute again with changeable operation mode indicated in Cnet V1 5 or later Check if Domain deleted or not Set remote control by PLC basic parameter communication in GMWIN to allowed and t
287. y is divided into Array where Tx Rx data is set and Constant area of station No and command Q Transmitted frame means transmitted data via communication channel Q ASCII codes displayed in HEX of transmitted data with H in front of each figure which is indicating HEX unit of HE Xdecimal figures do not contain actually transmitted data Register the transmitted data above in Frame Editor as in sequence below A Double click on frame No to edit in frame list of Figure 5 2 with mouse to display frame edit screen as below Itis a blank space before initial registration The Sth Main Frame Chapter 5 Frame Editor B Frame name Input frame name Max 16 characters of English letters and figures can be input as a frame name and registered name shall be the same as used for PLC programming in GMWIN lNotet Remark Note1 When inputting name do not use UDATA SEND or UDATA_ RCV which performs special function Refer to 7 1 User defined communication for more information If identical frame name is used as repeated normal communication is not available C TX RX Input Send for transmission and Receive for receiving Receive D Header As of an area indicating the start of data frame such control characters as ENQ Enquiry ASCII code of H05 STX Start of Text ASCII code of H02 and ACK Acknowledge ASCII code of H06 can be applied and in addition signs of and figures can be
288. ype EO sooi Function Block starts service at rising edge 0 to 1 and decides point of transmission time If Function Block is in service alteration of 0 gt 1 can be ignored SLOT NO SINT Selects slot the number of Cnet I F module to be transmitted to Function Block Specifies one of RS 232C channel RS 422channel in Cnet I F module to perform this Service CH BOOL 1 CH 0 transmitted to RS 232C side 2 CH 1 transmitted to RS 422 side FNAM STRN As set via Frame Editor it displays frame name with up to 16 characters to be Note 1 transmitted by this Function Block among downloaded frames via Cnet I F module automatic variables If input value is not set compile error is expected As a variable specifying the number of transmitted data USINT specifies the number of LENX eng data to be transmitted from the area set in SDx If there is no data to be transmitted in x 1 2 3 4 other words no segment set to ARRAY in Frame Editor LENs shall be all set to 0 If USINT Array is an input variable specifying the area of transmitted data for segment set to ARRAY in transmission frame Same number of SD areas shall be specified as the number of ARRAY segments Figures 1 2 3 4 behind SD mean sequence of segments SDx USINT set to ARRAY and areas for direct variables or indirect variables of PLC of Unsigned x 1 2 3 4 Array Short Integer Array can be specified ARRAY number of SDx shall be at least the same as the ARRAY number set in Fra

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

GLOFA GM glofa gm4 glofa gm6

GLOFA-GM

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents